Location via proxy:   [ UP ]  
[Report a bug]   [Manage cookies]                

Fuji FP232 Service Manual

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 277

SERVICE MANUAL

MINILAB
FILM PROCESSOR

FP232B
UL & CE Types

First Edition
PP3-C829UE
INTRODUCTION

This Servicing Manual outlines the maintenance and servicing procedures for the FP232B Film Processor.

This manual is a professional publication provided for qualified service personnel or persons fully trained in
equipment service procedures. All other personnel and operators are restricted from servicing the FP232B.
When maintenance service is needed, be sure to contact qualified service personnel.

The manual is divided into 13 chapters, with chapters 1-6 providing generally applicable information and
chapters 7-13 giving a detailed description of each part and each function. In order for specific details to be
accessed as quickly as possible, the headlines on the right edge of the contents page match the headlines of
the pages of each chapter. The contents of a particular chapter are listed on the first page of that chapter.

Precautions Generally Applying to All Servicing Operations


! WARNING
When servicing internal machine parts, make sure the power switch and the main power supply on the power distribution
board are both turned OFF.
If the main power is left ON, electricity will flow as far as the power switch and power supply section, and this can cause
electric shocks and/or short-circuiting.
If the power is left on, it is also possible for the machine to be accidentally activated, causing damage to the machine and/or
bodily injury.

! CAUTION
The light source section and dryer will be hot to the touch. Wait 15 minutes after turning off the power before commencing
with servicing procedures.

• To keep the parts free from fingerprints, wear gloves when handling the optical system parts.

• When mounting machine parts, take care not to sandwich any of the wires.

• Each connector is provided with a symbol indicating what it is to be connected to. Make sure the connectors are connected
to connectors, harness ends or parts bearing the corresponding symbols.

• The plastic connectors have a locking catch on the plug (male) end. To disconnect one of these connectors, loosen the
catch first; to connect it, make sure the catch engages (locks).

Service Manual Appropriations

1. All rights are reserved by the Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd. (FUJIFILM).

2. Manual usage is restricted to FUJIFILM equipment related technical and service


personnel.
3. This manual contains information relating to FUJIFILM equipment and is therefore
proprietary. Unauthorized disclosure is prohibited.

4. FUJIFILM’s prior consent is required in regard to the following.

• Manual copying in whole or in part.


• Disclosure of manual contents to unauthorized personnel.
• Manual uses for purposes other than technical service.
1. SPECIFICATIONS

2. OUTLINE AND OPERATION SEQUENCES

3. MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE

4. ERROR MESSAGES

5. CONDITION SETTINGS

6. MAINTENANCE SERVICE MODE

7. LOADER

8. PROCESSOR

9. PROCESSING SOLUTION CIRCULATION SYSTEM

10. PROCESSING SOLUTION REPLENISHMENT


SYSTEM

11. DRYER

12. DRIVE SYSTEM

13. CONTROL PANEL AND ELECTRICAL


EQUIPMENT SECTION
CONTENTS

1. SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

1.1 Main Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2


1.2 Design Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

2. OUTLINE AND OPERATION SEQUENCES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-0

2.1 Operation Sequences of Loader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2


2.1.1 Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2.1.2 Film Supply/Auto Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2.1.3 Film Detection/Type Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2.1.4 Film Trailing End Cutting (135 Size) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
2.1.5 Film Trailing End Cutting in Power Failure (135 Size) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
2.1.6 Film Sensor OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
2.2 Outline of Processing Solution Circulation System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
2.2.1 Processing Tank Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
2.2.2 Temperature of Processing Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
2.2.3 Subtanks and Circulation Loops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
2.2.4 Processing Rack Roller Arrangement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
2.3 Operation Sequences of Processing Solution Circulation System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
2.3.1 Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
2.3.2 Warm-up Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
2.3.3 Normal Temperature Control Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
2.3.4 Heat Save Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
2.3.5 Preheat Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
2.3.6 Cool-down Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
2.3.7 Full Waste Solution Tanks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
2.4 Outline of Processing Solution Replenishment System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
2.5 Operation Sequences of Processing Solution Replenishment System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
2.5.1 Standard Replenishment Amounts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
2.5.2 Pump Discharge Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
2.5.3 Replenishment Due to Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
2.5.4 Replenisher Levels in Replenisher Tanks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
2.5.5 Constitution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
2.6 Operation Sequences of Dryer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
2.6.1 Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
2.6.2 Warm-up Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
2.6.3 Normal Temperature Control Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
2.6.4 Cool-down Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
2.7 Operation Sequences of Drive System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
2.7.1 Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
2.7.2 Drive Motor Shutdown Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
2.8 Electrical Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
2.8.1 Electrical Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23

1
CONTENTS

2.8.2 CTL32 Circuit Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25


2.8.3 PWA32 / PWB32 Circuit Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
2.8.4 DC Power Supply (PU) Circuit Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28

3. MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

3.1 Routine Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2


3.2 Regular Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

4. ERROR MESSAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

4.1 General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2


4.1.1 Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
4.2 Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

5. CONDITION SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

5.1 Menu Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2


5.2 Timers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
5.2.1 Present Time Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
5.2.2 Weekly Timer Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
5.2.3 Preheat Timer Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
5.3 Processing Temperatures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
5.3.1 Processing Temperature Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
5.3.2 Save Mode Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
5.4 Replenishment Rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
5.4.1 Replenishment Rate Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
5.5 Replenisher Pump Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
5.5.1 Replenisher Pump Output Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
5.6 Emergency Processing Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
5.6.1 When the Processor Not Working . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
5.6.2 When the Processor Working . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
5.7 Error Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
5.7.1 Error Log Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
5.8 Room Temperature and Humidity Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
5.8.1 Room Temperature and Humidity Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17

6. MAINTENANCE SERVICE MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-0

6.1 Menu Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2


6.2 Processing Temperature Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
6.2.1 Processing Temperature Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
6.3 Temperature Correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
6.3.1 Temperature Correction Factors Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12

2
6.4 Input Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
6.4.1 Input Check Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
6.5 Output Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
6.5.1 Output Check Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
6.6 Setting Data Saving, Reading and Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
6.6.1 Setting Data Saving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
6.6.2 Stored Data Reading and Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
6.7 Error Log Clear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
6.7.1 Error Log Clear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
6.8 Replenishment Control Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
6.8.1 Replenishment Control Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
6.9 IX240 Replenishment Factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
6.9.1 IX240 Replenishment Factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
6.10 Water Replenishment Log/Water Replenishment Rate Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
6.10.1 Water Replenishment Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
6.10.2 Water Replenishment Rate Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
6.11 Water Replenishment Condition Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
6.11.1 DZP Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
6.11.2 Evaporation Rates (During Stand-by) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
6.11.3 Evaporation Rates (During Processing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
6.11.4 Evaporation Rates (During Power OFF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
6.11.5 Water Replenishment Rate Correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
6.11.6 Environmental Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
6.11.7 Room Temperature Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
6.11.8 Circuit Board Adjustments for Initial Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
6.12 Demonstration Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
6.12.1 Demonstration Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
6.13 Default Values/Hidden Running Total . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
6.13.1 Data Resetting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
6.13.2 Default Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
6.13.3 Hidden Running Total . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29

7. LOADER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-0

Parts Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2


7.1 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
7.1.1 E201 “Close Film Load Section Cover” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
7.1.2 E206 “Control Strip Not Cut, Check Cutter Unit” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
7.1.3 E300, E301 “# Lane 135 Film Not Cut, Check” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
7.1.4 E302, E303 “#. Film Cutting Fail or Mag. Guide Not Return.” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
7.1.5 E304, E305 “# Lane Film Length Abnormal” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21
7.1.6 E306, E307, E308, E309, E311 “#. #Film Cut, Check Magazine”
E320, E321 “# IX240 Film Cut Check Intermed. Ctrdg” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23
7.1.7 E400, E401 “# Magazine Guide Did Not Return” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25

3
CONTENTS

7.1.8 E402, E403 “# Perforation Sensor Abnormal” E404, E405 “# Film Sensor Abnormal”
E411 “Left 120 Sensor Abnormal” E412, E413 “# IX240 Sensor Abnormal” . . . . . . 7-27
7.1.9 E406, E407 “#. Perforation or Film Sensor Abnormal”
E409 “Left 120 or Film Sensor Abnormal”
E414, E415 “# IX240 or Film Sensor Abnormal” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29
7.2 Loader Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31
7.2.1 Input Check of Loader Cover Detector (S6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31
7.2.2 Output Check of Film Press Roller (SOL4/SOL5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31
7.2.3 Film Press Roller Solenoid (SOL4/SOL5)
and Safety Thermostat (TH5) Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32
7.3 Magazine Support Plate, Loader Bottom Cover and Auto Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34
7.3.1 Output Check of Auto Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34
7.3.2 Magazine Support Plate Cover Removal/Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34
7.3.3 Loader Cover Detector (S6) Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35
7.3.4 Loader Bottom Cover Removal/Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36
7.3.5 Auto Lock Release Switch Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37
7.3.6 Auto Lock Release Switch (S11) Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38
7.3.7 Auto Lock Solenoid (SOL1) Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38
7.4 Cutter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40
7.4.1 Input Check of Press Roller and Cutter Operating Position Detectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40
7.4.2 Output Check of Cutter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40
7.4.3 Cutter Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41
7.4.4 Cutter Operating Position in Power Failure Detector Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-42
7.4.5 Press Roller Operating Position Detector (S2/S3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-42
7.4.6 Cutter Operating Position Detector (S4/S5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-43
7.4.7 Power OFF Cutter Operating Position Detector (S8/S9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-43
7.4.8 Cutter Solenoid (SOL2/SOL3) Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-44
7.5 Feeder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46
7.5.1 Input Check of Film Sensors (FMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46
7.5.2 Film Sensor (FMS) Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46
7.5.3 Loader Cover Interlock Detector (S10) Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-48
7.5.4 Feeding Roller Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-49

8. PROCESSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

Parts Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2


8.1 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
8.1.1 E200 “Close Processing Section Cover” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
8.1.2 E204 “Urgently Close Processing Cover” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
8.1.3 E207 “Open Processing Section Cover” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
8.2 Crossover Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
8.2.1 Disassembly/Assembly of Crossover Rack No.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
8.2.2 Disassembly/Assembly of Crossover Racks No.2 to No.4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
8.2.3 Disassembly/Assembly of Crossover Rack No.5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11

4
8.3 Processing Racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
8.3.1 Processing Rack Belt/Roller Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
8.4 Processing Section Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
8.4.1 Input Check of Processing Section Cover Detector (S7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
8.4.2 Processing Section Cover Detector Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
8.4.3 Processor Ventilation Fan Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15

9. PROCESSING SOLUTION CIRCULATION SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1

Parts Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2


9.1 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
9.1.1 E000, E001 “Drain W# Waste Tank” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
9.1.2 E051, E052, E053, E055, E056, E057 “W# Working Tank Level Low” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
9.1.3 E500, E501, E502, E504, E505, E506 “N# Temperature Sensor Abnormal” . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
9.1.4 E600, E601, E604 “Heater (N#) Abnormal” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
9.1.5 E608 “Working Heater Overheated” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13
9.1.6 E700, E701, E702, E704, E705, E706 “N# Temperature Abnormal” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20
9.1.7 E905 “Control Data Abnormal. Reset Data” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26
9.2 Subtank Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27
9.2.1 Input Check of Processing Solution Level Detector (N1P to N4P) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27
9.2.2 Detector Protection Cover Removal/Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28
9.2.3 Processing Solution Level Detector Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28
9.2.4 Solution Temperature Detector Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29
9.3 Cooling Fan and Circulation Pump Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30
9.3.1 Output Check of Circulation Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30
9.3.2 Output Check of Processing Solution Cooling Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30
9.3.3 Circulation Pump Section Cover Removal/Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31
9.3.4 N1 Cooling Fan (F1) Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31
9.3.5 NS-1/NS-2/N4 Cooling Fan (F3) Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32
9.3.6 N1 Radiator Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32
9.3.7 Safety Thermo-Switch (TH1 to TH3) Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33
9.3.8 Processing Solution Heater (H1, H2, H3) Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33
9.3.9 Circulation Pump (P1) Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34
9.4 Waste Solution Tank Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37
9.4.1 Input Check of Waste Solution Level Detectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37
9.4.2 Waste Solution Level Detector Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37

10. PROCESSING SOLUTION REPLENISHMENT SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1

Parts Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2


10.1 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
10.1.1 E002, E003, E004, E005, E006 “N# Replenisher Tank Empty” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
10.1.2 E902 “Water Replenishment Not Working” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6
10.2 Replenisher Tanks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7

5
CONTENTS

10.2.1 Input Check of Replenisher Level Detectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7


10.2.2 Replenisher Tank Section Cover Removal/Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
10.2.3 Replenisher Tank Removal/Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
10.2.4 Replenisher Level Detector Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
10.2.5 Replenisher Filter Case Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11
10.2.6 Replenisher Pump Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11
10.2.7 Replenisher Pump Valve Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13

11. DRYER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

Parts Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2


11.1 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
11.1.1 E507 “DRYER Temperature Sensor Abnormal” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
11.1.2 E607 “DRYER Heater Abnormal” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5
11.1.3 E707 “DRYER Temperature Abnormal” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11
11.1.4 E708 “DRYER Temperature Increasing” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-17
11.2 Dryer Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-23
11.2.1 Roller/Belt Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-23
11.3 Dryer Heater and Dryer Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-25
11.3.1 Output Check of Dryer Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-25
11.3.2 Dryer Heater Section Cover Removal/Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-25
11.3.3 Dryer Temperature Detector (TS8) Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-26
11.3.4 Dryer Safety Thermo-switch (TH4) Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-26
11.3.5 Dryer Heater (H4) Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-27
11.3.6 Dryer Fan (F10) Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-27

12. DRIVE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

Parts Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2


12.1 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3
12.1.1 E210 “Wait Until Display Shows [Ready for Proc.]” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3
12.2 Drive Train . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4
12.2.1 Output Check of Drive Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4
12.2.2 Drive Motor Bracket Removal/Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4
12.2.3 Drive Motor (M1) Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5
12.2.4 Drive Gear/Sprocket Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6
12.2.5 Drive Chain Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6
12.3 Film Leader Collector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-7
12.3.1 Exit Electrostatic Eliminator Brush Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-7
12.3.2 Roller Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-7

6
13. CONTROL PANEL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

Parts Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2


13.1 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3
13.1.1 E202 “Processing!! Turn ON Power Switch” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3
13.1.2 E203 “Processing!! Turn ON Drive Start Key” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4
13.1.3 E904 “Communication Error” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
13.2 Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7
13.2.1 Output Check of Film Loading Lamp (Green Lamp) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7
13.2.2 Input Check of Drive Stop Switch (S1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7
13.2.3 Control Panel Removal/Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8
13.2.4 Power Switch Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8
13.2.5 Drive Stop Switch Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9
13.2.6 Film Loading Lamp (Green Lamp) Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9
13.2.7 Display Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10
13.2.8 Display Contrast Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11
13.2.9 Keyboard Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11
13.3 Electrical Equipment Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12
13.3.1 Electrical Equipment Cover Removal/Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12
13.3.2 Discharge Capacitors (C1, C2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12
13.3.3 CTL32 Circuit Board Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13
13.3.4 PWA32/PWB32 Circuit Board Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16
13.3.5 Power Supply (PU) Circuit Board Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17
13.3.6 Leakage Breaker Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17
13.3.7 Relay (K21, K22) Replacement (CE type only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18
13.3.8 Leakage Breaker Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18
13.3.9 Circuit Protector (CP1 to CP3) Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19
13.3.10 Noise Filter (NF1) Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19
13.3.11 Circuit Breaker (NFB) Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-20
13.3.12 SSR4 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-20
13.3.13 Counter (CNT) Replacement (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-21
13.3.14 Room Temperature/Humidity Detector (THT) Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-21
13.3.15 Part Selection Depending on Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-22

7
1. SPECIFICATIONS

1.1 Main Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

1.2 Design Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

1-1
1.1 Main Specifications

Item Specifications

Type Daylight-operated, floor-standing

Film Sizes IX240, 135, 126, 110, 120

Processing Capacity 22 rolls/hour (135 film 24 exposures, or IX240 film 25 exposures, 2 lanes)

Transport System Short film leader transport by timing belt

Processing Speed 268 mm/minute

CN-16Q

Temperature
Process Step Code Time
(°C/°F)
Color Developer N1 38 ± 0.2/100 ± 0.3 3 min. 19 sec.
Bleach N2 35 – 41/95 – 105 1 min. 10 sec.
Bleach-Fix N3 35 – 41/95 – 105 3 min. 12 sec.
Processing Stages
Super Rinse 1 NS-1 32 – 38/90 – 100 1 min. 31 sec.
Super Rinse 2 NS-2 32 – 38/90 – 100 1 min. 46 sec.
Stabilizer N4 32 – 38/90 – 100 42 sec.
Dry DRY 40 – 65/104 – 149 3 min. 00 sec.
Total 14 min. 40 sec.

Processing Chemicals Liquid type

Replenishment Automatic replenishment by fixed-flow pump

Built-in type, with solution level sensors and drain valves


Replenisher Tanks
Tank Capacity: 7 liters x 5

Tank Capacity (liters)


N1 9.4
N2 4.1
Processing Tank Capacity N3 8.6
NS-1 3.6
NS-2 3.7
N4 1.5

Waste solution Tanks Built-in type, with solution level sensors, 5-liter capacity x 2

Film Collection Film leader hanging system

Control System Sequence control by microcomputer

1-2
Item Specifications
Character liquid crystal display Display items : Pre-checks, post-checks, film types, error alarms, number of
Display rolls processed,
processing solution temperatures, film loading display, etc.

Weekly Timer Standard accessory

Film Counter Counting for each film size

FP232B UL FP232B CE
Voltage Single-Phase AC Single-Phase AC 220/230/240 V
Power Requirements
200/210/220/230/240 V 60 Hz 50 Hz
Line Frequency

Single-Phase AC200V AC210V AC220V AC230V AC240V


Power Consumption
Current Rating 11.3 A 12.0 A 10.5 A 11.0 A 11.2 A

Dimensions
1088 mm x 563 mm x 1170 mm (42.83 x 22.17 x 46.06 in)
(L x W x H)

Weight Unit weight approx. 130 kg (287 lbs)/Running weight approx. 200 kg (441 lbs)

IX240 Film Leader x 10 Dark Box x1


Film Leader x 10 Cleaning Bottle x1
Splicing Stand Assembly x1 Graduated Cylinder (100 ml) x1
Manual Crank Handle x1 Film Magazine for 110 x1
Splicing Tape (19 mm wide) x 1 roll Film Magazine for 126 x1
Standard
Splicing Tape (15 mm wide) x 1 roll Film Magazine for 120 x1
Accessories
Rack Tray x3 Nagative Film Receiver x1
Measuring Cup (5 liters) x1 Drive Chain Grease x1
Adjustment Bolt Leg Seat x4 Waste Discharge Cup x1
Floating Balls (x 82) x 2 bags Film Leader Hanger (with Two Hooks) x1
Tape Cutter Base Film Tongue Extractor
Emergency Dark Bag Table for Reattacher AT100
Pinch Cock (20 mm) Intermediate Cartridge
Leader Hanger Contamination Prevention Cover
Optional Accessories
Film Washing Rack Loader Condensation Prevention Fan
Film Cutter Blade (x 6) Filter Element Air Filter
Negative Cutting Inserter Dryer Heater for AC210V
Check Tape Supplier Elbow for Drain Hose

1-3
1.2 Design
1.2 Design Specifications
Specifications

Item Specifications

Temperature setting Standard Setting range Temperature alarm Heater alarm Sensor alarm
range and alarm N1 38.0 °C 30 to 40 °C Setting ± 1 °C 1 °C/10 min. 51.1 °C
monitoring range N2 37 °C 30 to 40 °C Setting ± 7 °C 1 °C/10 min. 51.1 °C
N3 37 °C 30 to 40 °C Setting ± 7 °C 1 °C/10 min. 51.1 °C
NS-1 35 °C 30 to 40 °C Setting ± 7 °C 1 °C/10 min. 51.1 °C
NS-2 35 °C 30 to 40 °C Setting ± 7 °C 1 °C/10 min. 51.1 °C
N4 35 °C 30 to 40 °C Setting ± 7 °C 1 °C/10 min. 51.1 °C
DRY (135) 50 °C 40 to 70 °C Setting ± 20 °C 5 °C/ 5 min. 102.3 °C
DRY (120) 60 °C and 35 to 75 °C

Temperature of N1 38.0 ± 0.2 °C


processing solutions N2 35 to 41 °C
(CN-16Q) N3 35 to 41 °C
NS-1 32 to 38 °C
NS-2 32 to 38 °C
N4 32 to 38 °C

Processing tank N1 9.4 lit.

capacity N2 4.1 lit.


N3 8.6 lit.
NS-1 3.6 lit.
NS-2 3.7 lit.
N4 1.5 lit.

Processing solution Type Aluminum casting


heater
Voltage AC240 V

Capacity N1 360 W
N2
Common 360 W
N3
NS-1
NS-2 Common 360 W
N4

Processing solution Type Self-recovery type mounted on processing solution heater aluminum body surface
heater safety thermostat
Open
64° ± 3 °C
temperature

Close
42° ± 3 °C
temperature

Standard replenisher N1-R 45.0 ml


amount (reference N2-R 20.0 ml
value for 1 roll N3-R 30.0 ml
of 135 mm film with NS-R 30.0 ml
24 exposures) N4-R 20.0 ml

1-4
Item Specifications

Replenisher tank Capacity Remaining amount when the alarm sounds


capacity and remaining
N1-R 7 lit. 1.0 lit.
amount when the alarm
N2-R 7 lit. 1.0 lit.
sounds
N3-R 7 lit. 1.0 lit.
NS-R 7 lit. 1.0 lit.
N4-R 7 lit. 1.0 lit.

Water replenishment Evaporation rates Evaporation rates Evaporation rates Water replenishment
condition (standard during (standard during (standard power OFF) rate correction
stand-by) processing)

N1 6.7 ml/h 11.5 ml/h 3.7 ml/h 30 ml


N2 6.4 ml/h 11.1 ml/h 2.4 ml/h 30 ml
NS 11.9 ml/h 22.0 ml/h 6.4 ml/h 60 ml
N4 7.6 ml/h 16.5 ml/h 3.1 ml/h 30 ml

Replenisher pump Type Bellows type

Output N1-R
N2-R
N3-R 50 [Hz] : 50 to 60 ml/30 sec.
NS-R 60 [Hz] : 60 to 72 ml/30 sec.
N4-R
N1W
N2W

Waste solution tank W1 (N1+N4+Chain) 5 lit.


capacity W2 (N2+N3) 5 lit.

Cooling fan control ON temperature OFF temperature

System 1 (N1) Setting + 0.2 °C Setting + 0.1 °C

System 3
Setting + 1.0 °C Setting + 0.5 °C
(NS-1, NS-2, N4)
Dryer heater Capacity 1000 W

Voltage 240 V ( )

Fan Amount
50 Hz 2.3 cubic meters/min (81 cubic foot/min)
of air
60 Hz 2.6 cubic meters/min (92 cubic foot/min)
expelled

Voltage AC100 V

Dryer safety thermostat Type Manual recovery type

Open
temperature 85 °C ± 5.6 °C (185 °F ± 10 °F)

Optional kit is required for 210V power supply.

1-5
1.2 Design Specifications

Item Specifications

Drive motor Type AC induction motor

Manual crank shaft speed 13 sec. / rotation

Drive speed 268 ± 3 mm/min. (10.55 ± 0.12 in/min)

Transformer Primary rating


AC 200 V, 210 V, 220 V, 230 V, 240 V ± 10 %
Secondary
AC 100 V ± 5 %
rating

Circuit breaker rating 240V 20A

Leakage breaker Code Rating Sensing Current Function


EFB 240V 20A 15 mA Heaters and 100V system
Code Rating Function
Circuit protectors
CP1 250V 10A Solution heaters
CP2 250V 10A Dryer heater
CP3 250V 10A 100V system
Relays (CE type only) Code Rating Function
K21 250V 20A Power ON/OFF for solution heaters
K22 250V 20A Power ON/OFF for dryer heater
SSR Code Rating Function
SSR4 240V 15A Dryer heater ON/OFF

50/60 Hz line 50 Hz 60 Hz
frequency Drive motor gear head “300k” mark “360k” mark
selection circulation pump N1 orifices 5 mm I.D. 4.5 mm I.D.

1-6
2. OUTLINE AND OPERATION SEQUENCES

2.1 Operation Sequences of Loader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2


2.1.1 Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2.1.2 Film Supply/Auto Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2.1.3 Film Detection/Type Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2.1.4 Film Trailing End Cutting (135 Size) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
2.1.5 Film Trailing End Cutting in Power Failure (135 Size) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
2.1.6 Film Sensor OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

2.2 Outline of Processing Solution Circulation System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8


2.2.1 Processing Tank Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
2.2.2 Temperature of Processing Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
2.2.3 Subtanks and Circulation Loops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
2.2.4 Processing Rack Roller Arrangement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11

2.3 Operation Sequences of


Processing Solution Circulation System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
2.3.1 Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
2.3.2 Warm-up Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
2.3.3 Normal Temperature Control Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
2.3.4 Heat Save Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
2.3.5 Preheat Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
2.3.6 Cool-down Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
2.3.7 Full Waste Solution Tanks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16

2.4 Outline of Processing Solution Replenishment System . . . . . . . . . 2-17

2.5 Operation Sequences of


Processing Solution Replenishment System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
2.5.1 Standard Replenishment Amounts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
2.5.2 Pump Discharge Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
2.5.3 Replenishment Due to Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
2.5.4 Replenisher Levels in Replenisher Tanks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
2.5.5 Constitution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19

2.6 Operation Sequences of Dryer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20


2.6.1 Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
2.6.2 Warm-up Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
2.6.3 Normal Temperature Control Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
2.6.4 Cool-down Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21

2-0
2.7 Operation Sequences of Drive System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
2.7.1 Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
2.7.2 Drive Motor Shutdown Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22

2.8 Electrical Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23


2.8.1 Electrical Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
2.8.2 CTL32 Circuit Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
2.8.3 PWA32 / PWB32 Circuit Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
2.8.4 DC Power Supply (PU) Circuit Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28

2-1
2.1 Operation Sequences of Loader

2.1.1 Outline

The loader has the following control features:

· Auto locking of loader cover to shield the inside of the loader from light to prevent film fogging.

· Monitoring of film leader and film transport inside the processor.

· Detection of type and length of film (information used to replenish processing solutions and dry film).

· Drive start and auto shut-off.

Outline of Loader Operation Sequences

Film leader supply

Auto lock Film detection, identification of type

Film trailing end cutting (135 size only) Film length identification

Film sensor OFF

2-2
2.1.2 Film Supply/Auto Lock

START

"Ready for Processing" message in


Process Mode

Processing Pre-check Test Running

Load film leader and film into loader. Load only film leader into loader.

Close loader cover. (Loader cover detector ON)

Press the [START] key. (if Drive motor stops)

Drive start (Drive motor ON)

0.2 second later

Auto lock (Auto lock solenoid ON)

Film trailing end passes by film sensor. 60 seconds later (Film sensor OFF)

45 seconds later

Auto lock release (Auto lock solenoid OFF)

END

: Operation : Decision : Human's Operation

2-3
2.1 Operation Sequences of Loader

2.1.3 Film Detection/Type Identification

This sequence serves to detect films and their sizes in the left and right lanes of the film leader, and this information is relayed to the
CPU. The CPU then displays the information and proceeds with the processing solution replenishment and drying, both corresponding
to the size of the film.

Film Sensor
Left Lane Right Lane

IX240 Film Perforation 120 IX240 Film Perforation

START

Film sensor is ON
Film starts to pass by film sensor.
for 1 or more seconds.
1 second later

Film sensor ON

7.8 seconds later


Time between
Perforation sensor,120 film ON and OFF
Identification of type sensor and IX240 sensor is measured and
check for 3.5 seconds. film length is
monitored.

Film sensor is OFF


Film trailing end passes by film sensor.
for 1 or more seconds.
Replenishment
1 second later
during this time

Film sensor OFF

11.3 seconds later

END

120 film processing

· Drying temperature is set to “120 drying temperature” 9 minutes after 120 film ON.

· Drying temperature is set back to “normal drying temperature” 7 minutes and 30 seconds after 120 film OFF.

Counting the Film Rolls


· For each type of film, the number of rolls processed daily and the total number processed are each increased by 1 at the film
OFF stage.

· The mechanical counter of the electrical equipment section is increased by 1 when the identification of the film type has been
completed.

2-4
2.1.4 Film Trailing End Cutting (135 Size)

In this operation sequence, the trailing end of the 135 mm film is detected and cut at a constant position.

START

135 mm films now being transported


from loader to processor are completely
pulled out of their film cartridge.

Magazine guide is drawn together with


film cartridge in cutter direction.
Left is right press roller
operating position
detectors ON

Film trailing end clamp Press roller solenoid


ON

Film cutter operating


position detector ON
Cutter operation
Cutter solenoid
ON-OFF

NO Film cutter operating


Is film trailing end cut? position detectors
remain ON
YES
NO
Did cutter operate 3 times?

YES

E302
Alarm
E303

NO Is magazine guide returned by Left, right press roller


operating position
spring within 5 seconds? detectors remain ON
YES
E400
Alarm
E401

Film trailing end clamp release

END

: Operation : Decision : Human's Operation

2-5
2.1 Operation Sequences of Loader

2.1.5 Film Trailing End Cutting in Power Failure (135 Size)

In the event of a power failure during film processing, the cutter is operated once if the film leaders and films are transported from the
loader to the processor using the manual handle :

START

Power failures during films are


transported from loader to processor.
Transporting
by manual handle
Films are completely pulled out of their
cartridges.

Magazine guide is drawn together with Power OFF cutter


operating position
film cartridge in cutter direction. detector comes ON

Cutter operates once only on left and Cutter solenoid


right films by capacitor C1 or C2. ON-OFF

END

2-6
2.1.6 Film Sensor OFF

This operation sequence serves to control the steps from after the film has been transported from the loader until the next film can be
installed.

STRAT

“DEV.” mark blinks on the display.

Film sensor
Film trailing end passes by film sensor.
OFF
1 second later

Film sensor OFF

45 seconds later

“Ready for Processing” message


appears.
Film processing OK lamp
(green) lights.
Buzzer sounds and lamp flickers for
1 second.
Auto lock is released.

END

2-7
2.2 Outline
2.2 Operation of ofProcessing
Sequences Solution
Automatic Loader (FP362B AL) Circulation System

2.2.1 Processing Tank Construction

The processing tanks are formed by molding, and nozzles for discharging the processing solutions and for circulation are provided at the
very bottom of each tank. These nozzles are connected to the drain valves and processing solution circulation pumps.

N3 NS-1 NS-2 N4 Processing Tank

N2
N1
NS/N4 Heater

Subtank

NS/N4 Cooling Fan

N1 Heater

N2/N3 Heater

N1 Cooling Fan

Waste Solution
N1 Radiator Level Detector

Circulation Pump

Drain Valves W1 Waste Tank W2 Waste Tank


F562

2-8
Concentration Correction Addition
N1-W N2-W

N1-R N3-R NS-R N4-R


(45 ml) N2-R (30 ml) (30 ml) (20 ml)
(20 ml)

Chain Drain

Color
Developer Bleach Bleach-Fix Super Rinse Super Rinse Stabilizer
N1 N2 N3 NS-1 NS-2 N4

W1 W2

Waste Solution Tank 1 Waste Solution Tank 2

2-9
2.2 Outline of Processing Solution Circulation System

2.2.2 Temperature of Processing Solutions

The temperature of the CN-16Q processing solutions can be set to between 30 ˚C and 40 ˚C for each processing tank, but the
temperature which will chemically guarantee its performance are indicated in the table below.

Processing tank Temperature of processing solution


N1 38 ± 0.2 ˚C
N2
35 to 41 ˚C
N3
NS-1
NS-2 32 to 38 ˚C
N4

2.2.3 Subtanks and Circulation Loops


Each subtank is integrated with a processing tank, and the 5 units listed below are mounted on it.

· Circulation filter
· Level detector
· Temperature detector
· Water filling nozzle (N1, N2 only)
· Replenisher nozzle (N1, N2, N3, NS-2, N4 only)

The processing solution which has been filtered by the circulation filter in the temperature control tank is returned to the bottom of the
processing tank via the radiator (N1 only) and the processing solution heater. The N1 line radiator and NS and N4 line heater are
provided with a cooling fan to cool the processing solution and enable the temperature to be controlled even when the room temperature
is high.

Configuration of Temperature Control Tank

Temperature Detector Level Detector

Replenisher Nozzle Filter Mounting Rod Processing Solution Heater

Circulation Filter

Cooling Fan
(for NS and N4)
Processing Rack

Subtank
Cooling Fan
Solution Flow

(for N1)

Radiator
Processing Tank
(for N1)

Recirculation Pump

F595

2-10
2.2.4 Processing Rack Roller Arrangement

Hard gray Squeegee

Flat tube with Hard gray


grooves

Hard white
Flat tube

Cloth
Hard black

Hard black Hard white

Hard gray Hard brown

Cloth Rubber black

Squeegee

F298

2-11
2.3 Operation Sequences of Processing Solution Circulation System

2.3.1 Outline

There are four operation sequences for temperature control : warm-up, normal operation, heat save operation and cool-down operation.
The diagram below shows the relationship between these sequences.

Normal temperature Heat save operation


control mode mode

Up mode

Warm-up
operation
Preheat operation

Preheat temperature Heat save mode


Cool-down control mode
operation

Temperature Control Operations

Drive is OFF and N1 heater is continuously OFF for 10 seconds

N1 solution temperature

N1 temperature
setting

N1 heat save
operation temperature
setting (difference
from setting
temperature) or
temperature of N2/N3
solutions is 35 ˚C, NS-1/
NS-2/N4 solutions is

2-12
2.3.2 Warm-up Operation

Objective The warm-up operation is designed to enable the temperature of the solutions in the six processing tanks to reach the
temperature settings after the power has been switched on or the processing solution heater started up.
Start condition Temperature control starts under the following conditions from the no temperature control mode.

Power ON operation
Processing solution heater startup operation (timer-activated start-up/instruction given by operator)
Solution The solution temperature is monitored at 1-second intervals.
temperature
monitoring
interval
Mode Processing
Condition solution heater Circulation pump Cooling fan

Until the solution temperature reaches the ON ON OFF


temperature setting
After the solution When the solution ON ON OFF
temperature has temperature is lower
reached the than the temperature
temperature setting setting
(normal operation, When the solution OFF ON ON or OFF
preheat operation) temperature is higher
than the temperature (see below)
setting
Cooling fan When the temperature of all the processing solutions has reached its setting, the fan is placed on
“standby” and is set ON when the temperature of any one of the solutions in the system exceeds
the ON temperature. Subsequently, it is set OFF when the temperatures of all the processing
solutions have fallen below the OFF temperature.
System Processing solution ON temperature OFF temperature
1 N1 Setting + 0.2 ˚C Setting + 0.1 ˚C
3 NS-1, NS-2, N4 Setting + 1 ˚C Setting + 0.5 ˚C
End condition Operation transfers to the normal operation sequence once the temperatures of the solutions have reached the
temperature settings.

2.3.3 Normal Temperature Control Operation

Objective Regular operation is designed to keep the temperature of each solution at its temperature setting after the warm-up
operation.
Start condition The warm-up operation has been completed.
The condition for terminating the heat save operation has been satisfied during the heat save operation
(see subsection 2.3.4).
Solution 1 second
temperature
monitoring
interval
Condition Mode Heater Circulation pump Cooling fan
The solution temperature is lower than the ON ON OFF
temperature setting

The solution temperature is higher than the OFF ON ON or OFF


temperature setting (see above)
End codition Operation transfers to the heat save operation when leader test processing is completed, the heat save operation is
assigned, drive is OFF and the N1 heater is OFF continuously for 10 seconds.
Operation transfers to the cool-down operation when the processing solution heater OFF operation has been
started.

2-13
2.3 Operation Sequences of Processing Solution Circulation System

2.3.4 Heat Save Operation

Objective The heat save operation is designed to keep the solution temperature at the heat save temperature in order to
achieve the following objectives.
Reduction of the processing solution heater operating time to conserve electric power
Shutdown of the operation of all circulation pumps to prevent deterioration of the processing solutions

Start condition Leader test processing is completed.


Warm-up is completed.
The heat save operation is assigned.
Drive is OFF.
The N1 heater is continuously OFF for 10 seconds.
Solution 1 second
temperature
monitoring
interval
Mode Processing solution heater Circulation pump Cooling fan
OFF OFF OFF
End condition When the N1 solution temperature falls below the setting to an extent greater than the “Temp. Range” set on the
“Heat Save Drive” screen or when the temperature of N2/N3 solutions has fallen below 35 ˚C or NS-1/NS-2/N4 below
33 ˚C, the heat save operation is stopped and the circulation pump is set to ON. For the first 10 seconds the
processing solution heater remains OFF so that the solution can be stirred. Normal temperaturer control is then
started. The message changes to “Warming Up” when the heat save operation is stopped.

2.3.5 Preheat Operation

Objective The preheat operation is designed to keep each solution temperature above a prescribed level when it might
otherwise fall below freezing point, such as at night or at other times when the power is OFF.
The operating time can be set once or twice in units of two hours.
Start condition The operating time assigned by “Pre-Heat Timer Set” has arrived.
Solution 1 second
temperature
monitoring
interval
Mode Processing
Condition Circulation pump Cooling fan
solution heater
The solution temperature is less than 25 ˚C ON ON OFF
The solution temperature is more than 25 ˚C OFF ON OFF
End condition The power switch is turned to STANDBY when the preheat end time (2 hours) is reached.
Operation transfers to the warm-up operation when the power switch is turned ON during preheating.
Operation transfers to the cool-down operation when any solution temperature enters an abnormal temperature
range.

2-14
2.3.6 Cool-down Operation

Objective The cool-down operation is designed to shut down the temperature control by the processing solution heater OFF
operation.
Start condition A warm-up, normal or heat save operation is in progress.
The processing solution heater shut down operation has been started.
Solution 1 second
temperature
monitoring
interval
Mode Processing solution heater Circulation pump Cooling fan
OFF OFF OFF
End condition The power switch is turned to STANDBY.
The processing solution heater OFF operation* is released.
The processing solution heater forced OFF operation is released.

* Solution heater OFF operation occurs: · When the solution level lowers.
· When solution temperature abnormality, solution temperature detector abnormality,
or solution heater abnormality occurs.

2-15
2.3 Operation Sequences of Processing Solution Circulation System

2.3.7 Full Waste Solution Tanks

Energize the level detector (float switch)


in each waste solution tank for half a
second once every 5 minutes, and
check the level of the solution.

Level detector ON ?
(Waste solution tank is full) OFF
ON

Alarm

Clear the alarm and continue film


Waste solution processing
processing.

Continuous 2nd alarm*

Waste solution processing

The level detector is set OFF.

* The level is checked continuously until waste solution is processed (The alarm cannot be cleared until waste solution is processed.)

: Operation : Decision : Human's Operation

2-16
2.4 Outline of Processing Solution Replenishment System

Replenisher
Nozzles

Solution
Temperature
Detector

Processing Solution
Level Detector

Circulation Filter

N4-R
Replenisher NS-R
Tanks N3-R
N2-R

N1-R

Replenisher
Level Detector

Drain Valves

Replenisher Filter Case

N1-R NS-R N2-R


N2-W N4-R N3-R N1-R
Replenisher Pumps

F368

2-17
2.5 Operation Sequences of Processing Solution Replenishment System

2.5.1 Standard Replenishment Amounts

Replenisher Standard replenishment amount per bottle for 135/24EX film


N1-R 45 ml
N2-R 20 ml
N3-R 30 ml
NS-R 30 ml
N4-R 20 ml

2.5.2 Pump Discharge Volume

Pump Type Pump discharge volume


N1-R
N2-R
N3-R
NS-R Bellows type 50 [Hz] : 50 to 60 ml/30 sec.
N4-R 60 [Hz] : 60 to 72 ml/30 sec.
N1-W
N2-W

· The pump discharge volume shall be the amount of solution discharged when the pump is operated continuously for 30 seconds
under the control of the timer.

2.5.3 Replenishment Due to Processing

The figure below shows the relationship between the amount of film processed and the replenishment timing.

Pump operating time (30 sec. fixed)

N1-R: Every
1.1 rolls

N2-R: Every
2.5 rolls

N3-R: Every
1.7 rolls

NS-R: Every
1.7 rolls

N4-R: Every
2.5 rolls

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

Number of film processed (Equivalent to 135 24 Exp.)

NOTE: · The figure above shows the replenishment timing when the pump discharge volume is 50 ml.
· The actual replenishment timing is corrected by changing the difference between the reference value and the actual discharge
volume measured by “Output check” into the number of film.

2-18
2.5.4 Replenisher Levels in Replenisher Tanks

The replenisher level detector detects a drop in replenisher level in one of the replenisher tanks drops, and alerts the operator with an
alarm.
The amount of replenisher remaining in each of the replenisher tanks when the alarm sounds is listed in the table below.

Amount of replenisher remaining


Replenisher tank Capacity of replenisher tank (liter)
when alarm occurs (liter)
N1-R 1.0 7.0
N2-R 1.0 7.0
N3-R 1.0 7.0
NS-R 1.0 7.0
N4-R 1.0 7.0

Normal mode:

· Energize the replenisher level detector (float switch) for 1 second once every 5 minutes, and check the replenisher level.
· If the replenisher level is low, the level detector will be set ON and the operator will be alerted by an alarm.
(The alarm can be cleared by pressing the [YES] key.)
The alarm is repeated every 5 minutes until replenisher is added.
(The level is checked continuously until replenisher is added after the 2nd alarm.)

Mode while replenisher is being added to compensate for loss by evaporation:

· Energize the replenisher level detector (float switch) for 1 second continuously, and check the replenisher level.
· If the replenisher level is low, the level detector will be set ON and the operator will be alerted by an alarm.
Then check the replenisher level continuously. (The replenisher alarm cannot be cleared until replenisher is added)

2.5.5 Constitution

N1-R N2-R N3-R NS-R N4-R

FS1 FS2 FS3 FS5 FS6 FS7

NS-1 NS-2 N4

N2 N3
N1
FS8 FS9 FS10 FS11 FS12
NS-R

N1-R

N1W
N4-R
N2-R

N2W
Replenisher filter
N3-R
Replenisher pump Replenisher level detector
FS

2-19
2.6 Operation Sequences of Dryer

2.6.1 Outline

Temperature control of the dryer is characterized by the following modes : no control, warm-up, normal temperature control and
cool-down. These modes stand in the relationship illustrated below.

Normal temperature control mode

Warm-up operation Cool-down operation

No temperature control mode

Example of temperature control operations

The dryer fan stops 60 seconds after


the dryer heater has been turned OFF.
High

Dryer temperature

Low

Dryer temperature
(Monitored second by second)

Warm-up Normal temperature Cool-down


operation control mode operation

2.6.2 Warm-up Operation

Objective The warm-up operation is designed to enable the temperature of the dryer to reach the temperature setting after
the drive has started.

Start condition Temperature control starts under the following conditions from the no temperature control mode.
· Power ON
· Processing section and loader covers Closed
· Drive start ON
Temperature The dryer temperature is monitored at 1-second intervals.
monitoring interval
Mode Condition Dryer heater Dryer fan
Dryer temperature is lower than drying ON ON
temperature setting
Dryer temperature has reached drying OFF ON
temperature setting
End condition The warm-up operation is terminated when the dryer temperature has reached its setting.

2-20
2.6.3 Normal Temperature Control Mode
Objective Normal temperature control is designed to keep the temperature inside the dryer at its setting after the warm-up
operation.

Start condition This mode is established as soon as the warm-up operation is completed.
Temperature The temperature inside the dryer is monitored at 1-second intervals.
monitoring interval
Mode Condition Dryer heater Dryer fan
Temperature inside the dryer is lower than ON ON
the drying temperature setting
Temperature inside the dryer is higher than OFF ON
the drying temperature setting
End condition Under the following conditions, the normal temperature control mode is terminated and the cool-down operation
starts.
· Drive stops (the dryer heater is set OFF as soon as drive stops and the dryer fan is turned OFF after 60 seconds).
· Power has been turned OFF or the heater OFF operation has started.

The dryer heater OFF operation starts under the following conditions.
· Drive stops after the auto-shut off period.
· The emergency stop switch is pressed.
· Drying temperature is abnormal, dryer heater is abnormal or abnormally overheated, or drying temperature
sensor is abnormal.

2.6.4 Cool-down Operation

Objective The cool-down operation is designed to shut down the temperature control by the heater OFF operation.
Start condition · Drive has stopped in the normal temperature control mode.
· The power OFF or heater OFF operation has been started in the normal temperature control mode or during the
warm-up operation.
Temperature The temperature inside the dryer is monitored at 1-second intervals.
monitoring interval
Mode Condition Dryer heater Dryer fan
For 60 seconds after operation has moved to OFF ON
cool-down
60 seconds after operation has moved to OFF OFF
cool-down
End condition This mode is terminated when the dryer fan is turned OFF.

2-21
2.7 Operation Sequences of Drive System

2.7.1 Functions

· The power generated by the drive motor is reduced by the gearbox and transmitted to the loader and processing and drying racks
through the drive chain and sprocket to transport the film leaders and films at a constant rate.
· When a power failure occurs, the film being processed can be saved by rotating the drive shaft using the manual crank handle at a
rate of approximately 13 seconds per turn. (During this operation if power has come back on, “FORCED DRIVE” function may be
selected and resume powered drive.)

Drive motor startup timing

The drive motor starts up at the times listed below.

· When the operator has installed the film leader and films into the loader after the “Ready For Processing” message has appeared,
and has closed the loader cover and pressed the [START] key.
· When the operator has selected “YES” for “Test Drive” in the pre-check mode and has pressed the [YES] key, then set the leader,
closed the loading section cover and pressed the [START] key.
· When the operator has on the “Process Control Strip” screen, installed the film leader and films into the loader, closed the loader
cover and pressed the [START] key.

2.7.2 Drive Motor Shutdown Timing

The drive motor stops at the times listed below.

· When the next film leader/film is not installed within 17 min after the drive motor has been turned ON.
· When the next film leader/film is not installed within 17 min after the film leader/film has passed through the loader.
· When the operator has pressed the emergency stop switch.
· When the operator has opened the processor section cover.

2-22
2.8 Electrical Equipment

2.8.1 Electrical Equipment

Drive Motor (M1)


· Supply of +5V and +12V voltages

Power Supply Terminal Board


PU Circuit
Board CTL32
Circuit <UL Type>
Board L1 L2
Counter
CNT)
PWA32
Circuit (for UL)/
Protector PWB32
L1 L2
CP1 to CP3) (for CE)
Circuit
Circuit Board
Breaker
NFB)
Noise Filter Step
NF1) Down
Trans-
former Common Grounding
Power Supply Line Side Side Wire
Terminal
Block (TB1)

Leakage Terminal Relays


Breaker Block (TB2) (CE only) SSR4
F349

CTL32 Circuit Board F580

· Program control <CE Type>


· Input control of detectors
· Keyboard and display control
L N
· Output control of solenoids, motors, pumps, fans,
heaters and LEDs, etc.

PWA32/PWB32 Circuit Board

· Relay ON/OFF control of AC100V and AC200-240V


voltages
· ON/OFF control of solenoids, motors, pumps and
heaters, etc.

Power Supply (PU) Circuit Board

Common Grounding
Line Side Side Wire

F580

Circuit Breaker

2-23
2.8 Electrical Equipment

continued

Symbol Rating Function Voltage Check terminal Tolerance Application


NFB AC240V20A Power supply R-S Solution heater,
AC200 Power suppy dryer heater, AC
- 240V terminal ±10% 100V step-down
Leakage Breaker board transformer
100-0
Symbol Rating Sensing Current Terminal board Motors, solenoids,
AC100V on step-down ±10% fans, pumps, etc.
EFB AC240V20A 15mA
transformer
Integrated circuits,
Noise Filter and solution,
+5V (GND1) +5V replenisher and
+5V (CTL32 board) ±0.2V waste solution level
Symbol Rating Function detectors, display,
NF1 AC250V20A 200V line etc.
+12V (GND+12)
+12V Buzzer, some relays
Circuit Protector +12V (PWA32/PWB32B
±0.6V and LED control
board)
Symbol Rating Function
CP1 AC250V10A Solution heaters
CP2 AC250V10A Dryer heater
CP3 AC250V10A AC100V system

Relay (CE only)

Symbol Rating Function


K21 AC250V 20A Solution heaters
K22 AC250V 20A Dryer heater

SSR

Symbol Rating Function


SSR17 AC240V15A Dryer heater ON/OFF

Step-down Transformer Terminal Block

F577

Voltage Used

2-24
2.8.2 CTL32 Circuit Board
CN6 CN7 (CN12) CN10 CN4 (CN9)

RF
GND3 RP
RS
(RB)
HMD LF
BZ N3 (DIP SW) LP CN8
TMP LS
N1 N2 OFF ON
LB

CN3
GND4
DRY N4
NS1 NS2
VR1
GND2
LED
CN5
CN13

5V
JP1

ON
GND1

CN2 CN11

F346

Symbol Name Function

5V Test pin +5V

GND1 Test pin Ground 1


GND2 Test pin Ground 2
N1 Test pin N1 temperature detector analog level
N2 Test pin N2 temperature detector analog level
N3 Test pin N3 temperature detector analog level
NS1 Test pin NS-1 temperature detector analog level
NS2 Test pin NS-2 temperature detector analog level
N4 Test pin N4 temperature detector analog level
DRY Test pin Dryer temperature detector analog level
HMD Test pin Room temperature detector analog level
TMP Test pin Room humidity detector analog level
RF Test pin Right film sensor output level
RP Test pin Right perforation sensor output level
RS Test pin Right IX240 sensor output level
LF Test pin Left film sensor output level
LP Test pin Left perforation sensor output level
LS Test pin Left IX240 sensor output level
LB Test pin Left 120 sensor output level
JP1 Jumper plug Backup bettery ON-OFF
VR1 Variable resister Monitor contrast adjustment

2-25
2.8 Electrical Equipment

continued

Symbol Name Function

Item DS- OFF ON


Not used 1 - -

Auto water replenishment


2 A NA
(Compensation of evaporation)

Control strip auto cut 3 NA A


DS DIP switch
Room temperature/
4 NA A
humidity detect

Not Used 5 - -
Not Used 6 - -
Not Used 7 - -
Demo Mode 8 NA A

2-26
2.8.3 PWA32/PWB32 Circuit Board
CN26 CN20 CN33 CN34 CN29

GND +12V
(+5) +5V GND
CN32 (+12)

COM
CN25
C2 C1
+LC
+RC CN27

CN24 SW
(CN36)
CP17 CP18
CN35
CN21 CP15
CN31
CP19
CP16
(U1) CN30
(1L) (2L)
CP12 CP11 CN38
(U2)
CN28 (V)
(2N) CP13
CN22 (1N) CP14
CN23 CN39
F348

Symbol Name Function


+5V Test pin +5V
GND(+5) Test pin Ground (+5V)
+12 Test pin +12V
GND(+12) Test pin Ground (+12V)
+RC Test pin Right cutter capacitor voltage
+LC Test pin Left cutter capacitor voltage
COM Test pin Cutter capacitor ground
(V) Test pin 100V
(U1) Test pin 100U1 system
(U2) Test pin 100U2 system
(1N) Test pin 200V (dryer heater)
(2N) Test pin 200V (solution heater)
(1L) Test pin 200V (solution heater)
(2L) Test pin 200V (dryer heater)
SW Switch Capacitor discharge switch
CP11 Circuit protector N1 solution heater (H1)
CP12 Circuit protector N2 solution heater (H2)
CP13 Circuit protector N3 solution heater (H3)
CP14 Circuit protector Power switch, timer circuit
CP15 Circuit protector Circulation pump (P1), replenisher pumps(P8 to P14)
CP16 Circuit protector Auto lock, press roller solenoids (SOL1,4 and 5)
CP17 Circuit protector Drive motor (M1), PU circuit board

CP18 Circuit protector Cutter solenoid (SOL2 and 3), power OFF cutter operating position detectors
(S8 and S9)

CP19 Circuit protector Cooling fans (F1 and F3), exhaust fan (F4), dryer fan (F10)

2-27
2.8 Electrical Equipment

2.8.4 DC Power Supply (PU) Circuit Board


CN2

(CN3)

RV51

FU1

CN1

F347

Symbol Name Function


RV51 Variable resister +5V voltage adjustmen
FU1 Fuse T2AH250V

2-28
3. MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE

3.1 Routine Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

3.2 Regular Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

3-1
3.1 Routine Maintenance Schedule

In order to keep the FP232B operating at peak performance, conduct regular maintenance and inspections as indicated in the table
below.

Pre-check Post-check Weekly Monthly

Dryer outlet rubber rollers Clean

Crossover racks Clean, No.1 Clean

Loader sensors Clean

Magazine guide operation Inspect

Control strip processing Inspect

Rack drive shafts, bearings and belts Clean

Film leaders Clean

Parts of machine Clean

Processing solution circulation filters Clean Replace

Dryer and cooling fan filters Clean

Replenisher filters Replace

Processing racks Clean

Present time Inspect

Tank processing solutions Replace (NOTE)

(NOTE) : Replace these solutions when they have not been used for 1 week or more or when, as a result of processing the
control strips, they are considered to be unfit for development processing.

3-2
3.2 Regular Maintenance Schedule

To keep the FP232B in peak working order, perform the inspection, cleaning or replacement procedures listed below at the interval
specified.

Every 1
Every year Every 3 years Reference section
month
Cutter blades (NOTE) Replace 7.4.3
Loader cover detector Inspect 7.2.1
Press roller operating position detector Inspect 7.4.5
Cutter operating position detector Inspect 7.4.6
Power OFF cutter operating position detector Inspect 7.4.7
Auto lock release switch Inspect 7.3.5
Film sensors Inspect 6.4.1
Auto lock solenoid Inspect 7.3.7
Film press roller solenoid Inspect 7.2.3
Cutter solenoid Inspect 7.4.8
Processing rack Clean Instruction Manual 11.6
Conveyor belt Inspect Replace –
Rollers Inspect –
Cooling fan Clean –
Dryer rack Clean –
Drive motor Inspect 12.2.1
Circulation pump Inspect 9.3.1
Replenisher pump Inspect 5.5.1
Temperature control heater Inspect –
Dryer heater Inspect –
Processing section cover detector Inspect 8.4.2
Processor temperature detector Inspect –
Dryer temperature detector Inspect 11.3.3
Processing solution level detector Inspect 9.2.1
Replenisher solution level detectors Inspect 10.2.1
Waste solution level detectors Inspect 9.4.1
Dryer fan Clean 11.3.6
Flow meter Inspect –
Circuit board, power supply & fuses Inspect –
Room temparature/humidity detector Inspect 13.3.14

(NOTE) : As a general guideline, the cutter blade must be replaced once a year. If large quantities of film are being processed,
the cutter will become dull in less than a year.

3-3
4. ERROR MESSAGES

4.1 General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2


4.1.1 Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

4.2 Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

4-1
4.1 General Description

4.1.1 Outline

The FP232B comes with self-diagnosis functions to deal with errors that may conceivably occur. When an error occurs, an alarm sounds
and an error message appears on the display.
When this happens, first check the “Error Messages” on the following pages to get the reference sections relevant to the error number.
Then proceed with the troubleshooting, and inspect and repair the machine.

! WARNING
· When engaged in inspection or repair work inside the machine during troubleshooting, make absolutely sure that the power switch is
first turned to STANDBY, and the built-in circuit breaker and power distribution switch are turned OFF.
The machine may sustain damage and operating personnel may suffer injury if the machine is activated while this work is being done
because the power was not switched off.
· The capacitors (C1 and C2) for cutting the end of the 135 film in the event of a power failure must be discharged before working on the
electrical equipment section (see subsection 13.3.2).

NOTE: Checkpoints for electrical inspection work


· Electrical failures and malfunctioning are quite often caused by faulty contact resulting from loose connectors or terminals.
Before starting the electrical diagnoses described in the troubleshooting guide, be sure to check that none of the connectors or
terminals are loose.
· A radio tester or digital tester is an effective tool for checking the electrical continuity in the troubleshooting of the electrical
paths of wiring and parts. In almost all cases, it enables the wiring or parts to be inspected without having to be disconnected
or removed from the machine. To check continuity, the connectors or wires are disconnected from the parts concerned, and the
probes of the tester now set to the ohm ( Ω ) range are connected to both ends where the continuity is to be checked. A lack of
continuity is indicated by a high resistance (approaching infinity) while continuity is indicated by a low resistance.

5313

· Connectors (male and female) which are connected to each other have numbers marked on them or on their harness ends.
Connectors with the same numbers must always be connected together.
· Plastic connectors are provided with locking catches at the plug (male) end. These catches must first be loosened before
disconnecting them. When re-connecting them, tighter them until they are locked properly.
Connectors

Catch

0305

4-2
4.2 Error Messages E000 to E201

Error Messages Description Reference


Section

The waste solution level detector (float switch) is energized once every 5
minutes to check the level except during water addition. If it is ON, the error
message is displayed. When the detector is continuously ON, the error
message can not be cleared until the solution level detector is OFF.
E000 Drain W1 Waste Tank. If this message is displayed before water addition, water can not be added until 9.1.1
the solution level detctor is OFF.
If this message is displayed before water adding to the N1 or N4 under the
water adding mode, water can not be added to the N1 or N4 until the solution
level detector is OFF.

The waste solution level detector (float switch) is energized once every 5
minutes to check the level except during water addition. If it is ON, the error
message is displayed. When the detector is continuously ON, the error
E001 Drain W2 Waste Tank. message can not be cleared until the solution level detctor is OFF. 9.1.1
If this message is displayed before water addition or under the water additing
mode to the NS or N2, water can not be added to the NS or N2 until the
solution level detctor is OFF.

E002 N1 Replenisher Tank Empty. The replenisher level detector (float switch) is energized once every 5 minutes 10.1
to check the level. If it is ON, the error message is displayed. When the
detector is continuously ON, the error message can not be cleared until the
E003 N2 Replenisher Tank Empty. 10.1
solution level detctor is OFF.

E004 N3 Replenisher Tank Empty. 10.1

E005 NS Replenisher Tank Empty. 10.1

E006 N4 Replenisher Tank Empty. 10.1

E051 N1 Working Tank Level Low. Not Driving: When the solution level is low continuously 1 second, this error 9.1.2
message is displayed. This error message can not be cleared
until the tank is refilled.
E052 N2 Working Tank Level Low. 9.1.2
Operation returns to "M005 Solution Warming Up" after the
message is cleared.
E053 N3 Working Tank Level Low. During Driving: When the solution level is low continuously 5 seconds, this 9.1.2
error message is displayed. This error message can not be
cleared during driving even if the tank is refilled. After the drive
E055 NS1 Working Tank Level Low. 9.1.2
is stopped, the error message can be cleared if the tank is
refilled.
E056 NS2 Working Tank Level Low. Operation returnes to "M005 Solution Warming Up" after the 9.1.2
message is cleared.
E057 N4 Working Tank Level Low. 9.1.2

If the processing section cover is opened when the [START] key is pressed, this
E200 Close Processing Section Cover. error message is displayed. 8.1.1
This error message can be cleared with the [YES] key.

If the loader cover is opened during the film sensor is ON, this error message is
E201 Close Film Load Section Cover. displayed. 7.1.1
The message is cleared when the loader cover is closed.

4-3
4.2 Error Messages

Reference
Error Messages Description
Section

E202 Processing!! Turn ON Power When the power switch is turned to STANDBY during driving, this error
Switch. message is displayed. 13.1.1
It is cleared when the power switch is turned ON.

When the drive stop switch is pressed during processing, this error message is
displayed after drive is stopped.
E203 Processing!! Press START Key The message is cleared and drive is re-started when the [START] key is 13.1.2
to Start. pressed.
The "E210" appears after re-starting.

When the processing section cover is opened during driving, this error
E204 Processing!! Close Processing message is displayed after drive is stopped. 8.1.2
Cover. The message is cleared and drive is re-started when the processing section
cover is closed.

E206 Control Strip Not Cut, Check If the film sensor is not turned OFF within 60 seconds after the cutter has been
Cutter Unit. operated with the DIP switch on the CTL32 circuit board is set to cut the control 7.1.2
strip, this error message is displayed.

When the power switch is turned to STANDBY with the processing section
E207 Open Processing Section cover is closed, this error message is displayed. 8.1.3
Cover. The message is automatically cleared when the power switch is turned ON.
The power is turned OFF when the processing section cover is opened.

When re-starting after forced drive stopping, or after the E203 is cleared, this
E210 Wait Until Display Shows error message is displayed. 12.1.1
[Ready For Proc.] In the specified time after the film sensor is OFF, this message is cleared
automatically.

E300 Right Lane 135 Film Not Cut If the cutter does not operate after the film sensor is OFF when loading the 135
Check. film on the right lane, this error message is displayed instead of "Ready for 7.1.3
processing".

E301 Left Lane 135 Film Not Cut If the cutter does not operate after the film sensor is OFF when loading the 135
Check. film on the left lane, this error message is displayed instead of "Ready for 7.1.3
processing".

When a film is in the loader section and the right cutter operating position
E302 R, Film Cutting Fail or detector is not OFF in spite of three times of right lane cutter operation, this
7.1.4
Mag. Guide Not Retrn. error message is displayed.
(Cutter operation=300 ms ON and 200 ms OFF)

When a film is in the loader section and the left cutter operating position
E303 L, Film Cutting Fail or detector is not OFF in spite of three times of left lane cutter operation, this
7.1.4
Mag. Guide Not Retrn. error message is displayed.
(Cutter operation=300 ms ON and 200 ms OFF)

E304 Right Lane Film Length When the right lane film sensor ON time exceeds the 400 seconds, this error
7.1.5
Abnormal. message is displayed.

E305 Left Lane Film Length When the left lane film sensor ON time exceeds the 400 seconds, this error
7.1.5
Abnormal. message is deisplayed.

4-4
E202 to E305/E306to E409

Error Messages Description Reference


Section

E306 Right 110 Film Cut, Check If the right lane cutter operates when loading the 110 film on the right lane, this
7.1.6
Magazine. error message is displayed instead of "Ready for Processing".

E307 Left 110 Film Cut, Check If the left lane cutter operates when loading the 110 film on the left lane, this
7.1.6
Magazine. error message is displayed instead of "Ready for Processing".

E308 Right 126 Film Cut, Check If the right lane cutter operates when loading the 126 film on the right lane, this
7.1.6
Magazine. error message is displayed instead of "Ready for Processing".

E309 Left 126 Film Cut, Check If the left lane cutter operates when loading the 126 film on the left lane, this
7.1.6
Magazine. error message is displayed instead of "Ready for Processing".

E311 Left 120 Film Cut, Check If the left lane cutter operates when loading the 120 film on the left lane, this
7.1.6
Magazine. error message is displayed instead of "Ready for Processing".

E320 Right IX240 Film Cut, If the right lane cutter operates when loading the IX240 film on the right lane,
7.1.6
Check Intermed. Ctrdg this error message is displayed instead of "Ready for Processing".

E321 Left IX240 Film Cut, If the left lane cutter operates when loading the IX240 film on the left lane, this
7.1.6
Check Intermed. Ctrdg error message is displayed instead of "Ready for Processing".

E400 Right Magazine Guide Did Not If the right press roller operation position right detector is ON for more than 5
Return. seconds during driving, this error messsage is displayed after turning OFF the 7.1.7
press roller.

E401 Left Magazine Guide Did Not If the left press roller operation position right detector is ON for more than 5
Return. seconds during driving, this error message is displayed after turning OFF the 7.1.7
press roller.

E402 Right Perforation Sensor If the right perforation sensor is ON when the [START] key is pressed during
7.1.8
Abnormal. the drive is OFF, this error message is displayed.

E403 Left Perforation Sensor If the left perforation sensor is ON when the [START] key is pressed during the
7.1.8
Abnormal. drive is OFF, this error message is displayed.

If the right film sensor is ON when the [START] key is pressed during the drive
E404 Right Film Sensor Abnormal. 7.1.8
is OFF, this error message is displayed.

If the left film sensor is ON when the [START] key is pressed during the drive is
E405 Left Film Sensor Abnormal. 7.1.8
OFF, this error message is displayed.

E406 R. Perforation or Film Sensor If the right perforation sensor is ON when the right film sensor is OFF during
7.1.9
Abnormal. the drive is OFF, this error message is displayed.

E407 L. Perforation or Film Sensor If the left perforation sensor is ON when the left film sensor is OFF during the
7.1.9
Abnormal. drive is OFF, this error message is displayed.

E409 Left 120 or Film Sensor If the left 120 sensor is ON when the left film sensor is OFF during driving, this
7.1.9
Abnormal. error message is displayed.

4-5
4.2 Error Messages

Error Messages Description Reference


Section

If the left 120 sensor is ON when the [START] key is pressed during the drive is
E411 Left 120 Sensor Abnormal. 7.1.8
OFF, this error message is displayed.

If the right IX240 sensor is ON when the [START] key is pressed during the
E412 Right IX240 Sensor Abnormal. 7.1.8
drive is OFF, this error message is displayed.

If the left IX240 sensor is ON when the [START] key is pressed during the drive
E413 Left IX240 Sensor Abnormal. 7.1.8
is OFF, this error message is displayed.

E414 Right IX240 or Film Sensor If the right IX240 sensor is ON when the right film sensor is OFF during driving,
7.1.9
Abnormal. this error message is displayed.

E415 Left IX240 or Film Sensor If the left IX240 sensor is ON when the left film sensor is OFF during driving,
7.1.9
Abnormal. this error message is displayed.

E500 N1 Temperature Sensor If solution temperature sensor reading exceeds 51.1 °C, this error message is
9.1.3
Abnormal. displayed. If the drive is OFF, the 200V power supply for solution heater is
turned OFF. This error message can not be cleared until the power switch is
E501 N2 Temperature Sensor turned OFF.
9.1.3
Abnormal.

E502 N3 Temperature Sensor


9.1.3
Abnormal.

E504 NS1 Temperature Sensor


9.1.3
Abnormal.

E505 NS2 Temperature Sensor


9.1.3
Abnormal.

E506 N4 Temperature Sensor


9.1.3
Abnormal.

If dryer temperature sensor reading exceeds 102.3 °C, this error message is
E507 DRYER Temperature Sensor displayed. If the drive is OFF, the 200V power supply for solution heater is 11.1.1
Abnormal. turned OFF.
This error message can not be cleared until the power switch is turned OFF.

E508 Thermometer (Room) If room temperature detector reading exceeds 51.1°C, this error message will
Abnormal. be displayed one at the next water replenishment.

E509 Hygrometer (Room) If room humidity detector reading is 100% RH, this error message will be
Abnormal. displayed one at the next water replenishment.

If the N1 solution temperature does not increase more than 1°C within ten
minutes during the N1 warming up, this error message is displayed. When the
E600 Heater 1 (N1) Abnormal. solution level is low (during E051 is displayed) or after warming up has been 9.1.4
completed, this check is not done. This error message can not be cleared until
the power switch is turned OFF.

4-6
E411 to E600/E601 to E706

Error Messages Description Reference


Section

If the N2, N3 solution temperature does not increase more than 1°C within ten
minutes during the N2 or N3 warming up, this error message is displayed.
If the N2 or N3 solution temperature does not increase more than 0.2°C
E601 Heater 2 (N2/N3) Abnormal. within ten minutes after either the N2 or N3 has been warmed up. 9.1.4
When the solution level is low (during E052 or E053 is displayed) or after
warming up has been completed, this check is not done. This error message
can not be cleared until the power switch is turned OFF.

If the NS1, NS2, or N4 solution temperature does not increase more than 1°C
within ten minutes during the NS1, NS2, or N4 warming up, this error message
is displayed.
E604 Heater 3 (NS1/NS2/N4) If the NS1, NS2, or N4 solution temperature does not increase more than 0.2°C
Abnormal. within ten minutes after either the NS1, NS2, or N4 has been warmed up. 9.1.4
When the solution level is low (during E055, E056, or E057 is displayed) or
after warming up has been completed, this check is not done. This error
message can not be cleared until the power switch is turned OFF.

If the dryer temperature does not increase more than 5°C within five minutes
after the drive is ON, this error message is displayed. When the solution level is 11.1.2
E607 DRYER Heater Abnormal. low (during E051 is displayed) or after warming up has been completed, this
check is not done. This error message can not be cleared until the power
switch is turned OFF.

If a solution heater safety thermostat is activated, this error message is


E608 Solution Heater Overheated. displayed and the 200V power supply for solution heaters is turned OFF. 9.1.5
This error message can not be cleared until the power switch is turned OFF.

If the dryer heater safety thermostat is activated, this error message is


E609 DRYER Heater
displayed and the 200V power supply for dryer heater is turned OFF.
Overheated
This error message can not be cleared until the power switch is turned OFF.

If the N1 solution temperature exceeds the setting temperature ±1°C for 30


seconds after warming up has been completed, this error message is
displayed. 9.1.6
E700 N1 Temperature Abnormal.
Then the power supply for solution heaters is turned OFF during the drive is
OFF and the temperature exceeds 45°C.
This error message can not be cleared until the power switch is turned OFF.

E701 N2 Temperature Abnormal. If the solution temperature exceeds the setting temperature ±7°C for 30 9.1.6
seconds after warming up has been completed, this error message is
displayed.
E702 N3 Temperature Abnormal. 9.1.6
Then the power supply for solution heaters is turned OFF during the drive is
OFF and the temperature exceeds 45°C.
E704 NS1 Temperature Abnormal. This error message can not be cleared until the power switch is turned OFF. 9.1.6

E705 NS2 Temperature Abnormal. 9.1.6

E706 N4 Temperature Abnormal. 9.1.6

4-7
4.2 Error Messages E707 to E913

Error Messages Description Reference


Section

If the dryer temperature exceeds the setting temperature ±20°C, or upper or


lower limit after dryer warming up has been completed, this error message is
E707 DRYER Temperature displayed, then the power supply for dryer heaters is turned OFF. 11.1.3
Abnormal. This error message can not be cleared until the power switch is turned OFF.
Upper Limit: 75°C Lower Limit: 35°C

If the dryer temperature does not increase more than 45°C within 9 minutes
E708 DRYER Temperature
after the drive starts, this error message is displayed. 11.1.4
Increasing.
When it reaches to 45°C, the error message is automatically cleared.

E902 Water Replenishment When communication error occurs during communicating to the host computer,
10.1.2
Not Working. this error message is displayed.

When communication error occurs during communicating to the host computer,


E904 Communication error 13.1.3
this error message is displayed.

The setting data are checked every 6 minutes during the drive is OFF. If they
exceed the upper or lower limit, this error message is displayed. Then the
check is discontinued but the error flag can not be cleared. The error message
can be cleared by pressing the [YES] key, however, it is displayed again when
the drive is attempted to start.

E905 Control Data Abnormal. Reset Setting Limits: 9.1.7


Data. Replenishment Rate: 0.0 to 99.0 ml
Pump Output: 10 to 99 ml
Temperatures Displayed: 0.0 to 99.9°C
Evaporation Rate: 0.0 to 99.9 ml
Water Replenishment Rate: 0 to 300
IX240 replenishment Factor: 40 to 200

If the room temperature or humidity exceeds the specified limits for 30


seconds, this error message will be displayed when the next water
E906 Deta for Auto-evap. replenishment.
Compensation Abnormal
Temperature Limit: 5°C to 42°C
Humidity Limit: 10% to 90%

When the program is not running properly, reset the CPU and run the program
again. When the program error has occurres, this error message is displayed,
then the data initialization is performed. The data is reloaded from the
E913 System Malfunction
EEPROM.
Initialized Data.
If the drive is ON, the message is cleared by pressing the [YES] key and drive
is automatically re-started. The “Forced Drive is ON” message appears after
re-starting.

4-8
5. CONDITION SETTINGS

5.1 Menu Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

5.2 Timers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6


5.2.1 Present Time Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
5.2.2 Weekly Timer Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
5.2.3 Preheat Timer Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

5.3 Processing Temperatures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10


5.3.1 Processing Temperature Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
5.3.2 Save Mode Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11

5.4 Replenishment Rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12


5.4.1 Replenishment Rate Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12

5.5 Replenisher Pump Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13


5.5.1 Replenisher Pump Output Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13

5.6 Emergency Processing Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15


5.6.1 When the Processor Not Working . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
5.6.2 When the Processor Working . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15

5.7 Error Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16


5.7.1 Error Log Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16

5.8 Room Temperature and Humidity Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17


5.8.1 Room Temperature and Humidity Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17

5-1
5.1 Menu
5.1 Menu Table Table

MODE

MOOB Mode 0-9?

MODE + 4

Present Time
M400 Machine Condition Settings M410 Present Time Set ?
YES YES
Setting 1 ? Y/N Y/N

Machine Condition Setting 1


SUB 1

Timer ON Time Settings M420 Nex t ON Time


SUB 2 YES
Setting ? Y/N

Timer ON Day Settings M430 Nex t ON Day Setting ?


SUB 3 YES
(1:ON 0:OFF) Y/N

Prehert Timer Settings M440 Pre-Heat Timer Set ?


SUB 4 YES
Y/N

5-2
M411 Present Time (###)
MODE
YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM ?

YES

M421 Nex t ON Time


MODE
HH:MM Y

YES

Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat


MODE
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ?

M431
YES

M441 Pre -Heat Timer 1 M442 Pre -Heat Timer 2


YES MODE
1:ON 0:OFF HH:MM ? 1:ON 0:OFF HH:MM ?

M007 Ready for Process.


YES
N1:##.#˚C

5-3
5.1 Menu Table

MODE + 5

Processing Temperature
M500 Machine Condition Settings M510 Temperature Set ?
YES YES
Setting 2 ? Y/N Y/N

Machine Condition Setting 2


SUB 1

M513 Heat Save Drive


Save Mode Settings 1:ON 0:OFF ?
YES

Replenishment Rate
Settings
M520 Replenishment
SUB 2 YES
Rate Set ? Y/N

Replenishment Pump
Output Check
M530 Pressent Pump
SUB 3 YES
Output Data ? Y/N

Replenishment Pump
Output Measurement/
Settings
M540 P.Output Check ? Y/N
SUB 4 YES
Press START key to Start

MODE + 6

Emergency Processing
M600 Machine Condition Mode M610 Emergency
YES YES
Setting 3 ? Y/N Process Mode ? Y/N

Machine Condition Setting 3


SUB 1

Error Log Verification M620 Error Log ?


SUB 2 YES
Y/N

Room Temperature and


Humidity Check M630 Room Temperature/
SUB 3 YES
Humidity ? Y/N

5-4
N1:##.# N2/N3:## DRY110/126/135/240:##
YES MODE
NS1/NS2/N4:## (˚ C ) ? DRY120:## (˚C)?

M511 M512

YES

M514 Temp. Range


MODE
#.#˚C ?

YES

N1R:##.# N2R:##.# NSR:##.# N4R:##.#


YES MODE
N3R:##.# (ml) ? (ml) ?

M521 M522

YES

N1R:## N2R:## N3R:## N1W:## N2W:##


YES MODE
NSR:## N4R:## (ml) Y (ml) Y

M531 M532

YES

N1R:## N2R:## N3R:## N1W:## N2W:##


YES MODE
NSR:## N4R:## (ml) ? (ml) ?

M541 M542
M007 Ready for Process.
YES
N 1 : # # . #˚ C

M543 ### Repl. Pump is


START
Running ##sec

M611 Press Start key for


MODE
Drive Compulsory Start Y

M007 Ready for Process.


YES
N 1 : # # . #˚ C

# E### MM/DD HH:MM


MODE
E### MM/DD HH:MM Y

M621

M 631 Room Temp./Humidity


MODE
Temp.:##˚C Hum:##%RH Y

M007 Ready for Process.


YES
N1:##.#˚C

5-5
5.2 Timers

5.2.1 Present Time Settings

NOTE: If the present time is not set correctly, the calender 8) Using the [YES] key, move the cursor to the
timer and preheat timers will not activate the system minute position.
at the correct time, and the error messages will not
show the correct date or time. 9) Using the numeral keys, change the minute
display to the present minute.
1. Press the [MODE] key.
10) Press the [YES] key.

MOOB M o d e 0-9? NOTE: The cursor can be returned to reset using


the [BACK SHIFT] key until the [YES] key
is pressed.

2. Press the [4] key while holding the [MODE] key down. 6. Verify the present time and press the [YES] key to
return to “M420 Next ON Time Setting ?” screen or
press the [MODE] key to return to the mode setting
M400 Machine Condition screen.
Setting 1 ? Y / N

3. Press the [YES] key.

M410 Present Time Set ?


Y / N

4. Press the [YES] key.

M411 Present Time (Mon)


1996/09/30 10:00 ?

5. Verify the set date and time, perform the settings with
the following procedures.

1) Check the cursor is positioned on the year


position and change the year display to the
present year by entering numerals using the
numeral keys.

2) Using the [YES] key, move the cursor to the


month position.

3) Using the numeral keys, change the month


display to the present month.

4) Using the [YES] key, move the cursor to the day


position.

5) Using the numeral keys, change the day display


to the present day.

NOTE: The day of the week is automatically


changed by changing the date.

6) Using the [YES] key, move the cursor to the hour


position.

7) Using the numeral keys, change the hour display


to the present hour.

5-6
5.2.2 Weekly Timer Settings

The scheduled work days and the timer ON times can be <Example>
preset in the weekly timer one week in advance.
Once the weekly timer is turned ON, the processing solution The screen below shows an example of settings where the
circulation pumps and heaters are activated to raise the timer is set to come ON at 8:30 AM.
temperatures of the solutions by the scheduled work
commencement time and then to control the temperatures
within the set ranges. If the power switch is not manually M421 Next On Time
turned ON within 3 hours after the timer is turned ON, the
0 8 : 30 ?
system turns the main power supply off.

Timer ON Time Settings Timer ON Day Settings

1. Press the [MODE] key. 1. Press the [YES] key after settings the timer ON time
on the “M421 Next ON Time” screen.

MOOB M o d e 0-9?
M430 Next On Day Setting ?
(1:ON 0:OFF) Y/ N
2. Press the [4] key while holding the [MODE] key down.
2. Press the [YES] key.

M400 Machine Condition


Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat
Setting 1 ? Y / N
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ?
3. Press the [SUB] and [2] keys. M431

3. Check the timer ON days and perform the settings with


M420 Next On Time the following procedures as necessary.
Setting ? Y / N
NOTE: Enter “1” for scheduled work days and “0” for a
holiday.
4. Press the [YES] key.
1) Check that the cursor is positioned on the Sunday
position and enter “0” or “1”.
M421 Next On Time
NOTE: The cursor moves to the next day position
HH:MM ?
automatically after “0” or “1” is entered on
a day position.
NOTE: · Set the timer ON times approximately one
hour prior to the scheduled work 2) Press the [YES] key after the all days settings.
commencement time.
· The hours must be entered on a 24-hour <Example>
basis: “1:00 PM” is entered as “13:00”.
The screen below shows an example of settings where
5. Verify the settings, and perform the settings with the Saturday and Sunday are holidays and work is to be done on
following procedures. all other days, and where the timer is set to come ON at the
timer ON time set on “M421 Next ON Time” screen.
1) Check that the cursor is positioned on the hour
position and enter the timer ON hour using the
numeral keys. Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ?
2) Move the cursor to the minute position by
pressing the [YES] key. M431

3) Enter the timer ON minute using the numeral 4. Press the [YES] key to move to “M440 Pre-Heat Timer
keys. Set ?” screen or press the [MODE] key to return to the
mode setting screen.
4) Press the [YES] key.

NOTE: The cursor can be returned to reset using


the [BACK SHIFT] key until the [YES] key
is pressed.

5-7
5.2 Timers

5.2.3 Preheat Timer Settings

The preheat timers are used to prevent crystallization of the When the preheat timers are not going to be used:
processing solutions not being used.
This may be caused by falling temperatures in the winter 1) Since the cursor is positioned on the hour
months. position, press the [YES] key twice and enter “0”
Depending on the climatic conditions, the timers may by set (“OFF”).
to come ON either once or twice. By setting the preheat
timer(s), the heaters will by activated every day at the preset 2) Press the [YES] key.
times and stop operating two hours later.
When ceasing to use of the preheat timers:
NOTE: · Ensure that the preheat timer ON setting does not
coincide with the weekly timer ON setting. If it does, Since “1” (“ON”) is set, enter “0” and press the [YES] key.
the first set timer will by given priority and all the
power will be shut down at the OFF time.
For example, if the weekly timer setting is 5:00 and M441 Pre-Heat Timer 1
the preheat timer ON setting is 3:30, then at 5:30 (2
1:ON 0:OFF HH:MM ?
hours after the preheat timer ON time) all the power
will be shut down.
· Generally, the preheat timers are used when the • The Pre-Heat Timer 2 screen now appears.
room temperature is expected to drop below 10 °C
(50ÜV) at night when the system is not operated When the preheat timers are going to be used:
and when temperature control will not be exercised
for 8 or more hours. 1) Since the cursor is positioned on the hour
position, enter the hour using the numeral keys.
2 hours
ON OFF NOTE: The hours must be entered on a 24-hour
basis.

03:30 05:00 05:30


Pre-heat Timer Weekly Timer Power M441 Pre-Heat Timer 1
ON Time ON Time Switch
OFF 1:ON 0:OFF HH:MM ?

1. Press the [MODE] key.


2) Press the [YES] key.

MOOB M o d e 0-9? 3) Since the cursor is positioned on the minute


position, enter the minute using the numeral keys.

4) Press the [YES] key.


2. Press the [4] key while holding the [MODE] key down.
5) Enter “1” (“ON”).

M400 Machine Condition 6) Press the [YES] key.

Setting 1 ? Y / N • The Pre-Heat Timer 2 screen now appears.

3. Press the [SUB] and [4] keys. 5. Set the timer on the Pre-Heat Timer 2 screen with the
same procedures as the timer 1.

M440 Pre-Heat Time Set ?


Y / N

4. Press the [YES] key.

M441 Pre-Heat Timer 1


1:ON 0:OFF HH:MM ?

5-8
<Example>

In the example of the screen shown below, timer 1 activates


the heater at 11:30 PM for a 2-hour operating period and
timer 2 activates the heater at 3:30 AM, also for 2 hours.

M441 Pre-Heat Timer 1


1:ON 0:OFF 23: 30 ?

M442 Pre-Heat Timer 2


1:ON 0:OFF 03:30 ?

NOTE: · The heater's operating time for T2 can be


overlapped with the operating time for T1.
For example, if T1 is set at 11:30 and T2 is set at
1:00, the heaters are operated continuously from
11:30 to 3:30.
· Make sure the heater ON times and weekly timer
ON time do not coincide.

6. If timer 2 is not necessary, press the [NO] key. Or if


timer 2 has been set, press the [YES] key.

• The Ready for Process screen now appears. If the


solution is warming up, “M005 solution Warming Up”
screen is displayed.

5-9
5.3 Processing Temperatures

5.3.1 Processing Temperature Settings

8. Following steps 5 and 6, set the temperatures for


Precessing tank Standard temperature
“DRY”, “110/126/135/240” and “DRY 120”.
N1 38.0 ˚C (100.4 ˚F)
N2 37 ˚C (98.6 ˚F) NOTE: The dry temperature is preset to the standard
N3 37 ˚C (98.6 ˚F) temperature at the factory before shipping.
NS-1 35 ˚C (95 ˚F) However, it is influenced by the temperature
NS-2 35 ˚C (95 ˚F) and humidity of the room.
N4 35 ˚C (95 ˚F) Determine the dry temperature by processing
Dryer 110/126/135/240 50 ˚C (122 ˚F) the test films.
Dryer 120 60 ˚C (140 ˚F) Generally, set the dry temperature to high
when the humidity is high and to low when
1. Press the [MODE] key. they are low.

9. After verifying the displayed temperature, press the


MOOB M o d e 0-9?
[YES] key to move to “M513 Heat Save Drive” screen
or press the [MODE] key to return to the mode setting
screen.
2. Press the [5] key while holding the [MODE] key down.

M500 Machine Condition


Setting 2 ? Y / N

3. Press the [YES] key.

M510 Temperature Set ?


Y / N

4. Press the [YES] key.

N1:38. 0 N2/N3:37
NS1/NS2/N4:35 (˚ C ) ?
M511

5. Check the cursor is positioned on the “N1” position.


Enter (set) the processing temperature for N1 using
the numeral keys.

NOTE: The standard temperature indicated in the


table should be determined. When it is set for
the first time.

6. After verifying the temperature setting, move the


cursor using the [YES] key and enter the processing
temperature for “N2/N3” and “NS1/NS2/N4” in
sequence using the numeral keys.

NOTE: If no changes need to be made, press the


[YES] key only.

7. Verify the temperature settings and press the [YES]


key.

DRY110/126/135/240:50
DRY120:60 (˚ C ) ?
M512

5-10
5.3.2 Save Mode Settings

All the heaters and circulation pumps will automatically stop 6. Verify the temperature range setting and press the
operating when “Ready for Processing” is displayed (drive [YES] key to move to “Replenishment Rate Set ?”
motor is not operating) once the save mode has been screen or press the [MODE] key to return to the mode
established. When the temperature of the N1 solution drops setting screen.
below the set temperature range or the temperature of N2/N3
solution drop below 35°C or NS-1/NS-2/N4 solution drops
below 33°C, the heating operation commences in order to
return the solution concerned to the operating temperature.

NOTE: When performing “Save Mode Settings” right after


“Processor Temperature Settings” (see subsection
5.3.1), step 1 to 3 can be skipped.

1. Press the [MODE] key.

MOOB M o d e 0-9?

2. Press the [5] key while holding the [MODE] key down.

M500 Machine Condition


Setting 2 ? Y / N

3. Press the [YES] key eight times.

M513 Heat Save Drive


1:ON 0:OFF 0 ?

4. Using the numeral key, enter “1” (“ON”) and press the
[YES] key.

M514 Temp. Range


#. # ˚C ?

5. Using the numeral keys, set the allowable temperature


range.

NOTE: When the [^] key is pressed, and it falls in.


Temperature range is 0.1 to 1.0°C.

<Example>

The following screen shows an example of a Heat Save Drive


setting where the save operation is to be conducted until the
temperature range reaches 0.3°C.

M514 Temp. Range


0. 3 ˚C ?

5-11
5.4 Replenishment Rates

5.4.1 Replenishment Rate Settings

Standard Replenishment Rates 9. After verifying the replenisher rate settings, press the
[YES] key to move to “M530 Present Pump Output
Replenisher Standard replenishment Data ?” screen or press the [MODE] key to return to
the mode setting screen.
N1-R 45.0 ml
N2-R 20.0 ml
N3-R 30.0 ml
NS-R 30.0 ml
N4-R 20.0 ml

1. Press the [MODE] key.

MOOB M o d e 0-9?

2. Press the [5] key while holding the [MODE] key down.

M500 Machine Condition


Setting 2 ? Y / N

3. Press the [SUB] and [2] keys.

M520 Replenishment
Rate Set ? Y / N

4. Press the [YES] key.

N1R:45.0 N2R:20.0
N3R:30.0 (ml) ?
M521

5. Rewrite the “N1R” replenisher rate by entering


numerals using the numeral keys.

NOTE: When the machine has just been installed, the


standard replenishing rates are already set
and there is no need to rewrite them.

6. Using the [YES] key, move the cursor and set the rates
for the “N2-R” and “N3-R” replenisher in sequence.

7. Press the [YES] key.

NSR:30.0 N4R:20.0
(ml) ?
M522

8. Using the [YES] key, move the cursor and set the rates
for the “NSR” and “N4R” replenisher in sequence.

5-12
5.5 Replenisher Pump Output

5.5.1 Replenisher Pump Output Settings

Initial 7. Press the [YES] key.


Replenisher Pump Pump Output
Output
N1-R, N2-R, N3-R, 50 Hz: N1R:50 N2R:50 N3R:50
NS-R, N4-R, N1W, 50 to 60 ml/30 sec.
50 ml
N2W 60 Hz: NSR:50 N4R:50 (ml) ?
60 to 72 ml/30 sec.
M541

NOTE: When installing the machine, the replenishment 8. Open the sub-tank section cover, remove the N1-R
condition is set using the water filling. At this time, set replenisher discharge nozzle from the sub-tank and
the default values instead of measuring the output. insert it in the 100 ml measuring cylinder (accessory).
At this point, hold the nozzle at the same height as its
1. Press the [MODE] key. installation position.

N1 Replenisher Discharge Nozzle


MOOB M o d e 0-9?

2. Press the [YES] key while holding the [MODE] key


down.

M500 Machine Condition


Setting 2 ? Y / N

3. Press the [SUB] and [3] keys.


100 ml Measuuring Cylinder
F487

M530 Present Pump 9. Press the [START] key.


Output Data ? Y / N
• The replenisher pump, where the cursor is
positioned, is activated and the message shown
4. Press the [YES] key and check the values for “N1R”, below appears after the alarm sounds.
“N2R”, “N3R”, “NSR” and “N4R”.

M543 N1R Repl. Pump is


N1R:50 N2R:50 N3R:50
Running ##sec
NSR:50 N4R:50 (ml) Y
M531 • After the prescribed time (30 sec.) has elapsed, the
replenisher pump automatically stops and the alarm
5. Press the [YES] key and check the values for “N1W” sounds, then the operation returns to the output
and “N2W”. check screen.

10. Record the amount of replenisher output to the


N1W:50 N2W:50 measuring cylinder.
(ml) Y
NOTE: When the measurement is extremely low or
M532 when the system is installed, operate the
pump two or three times to release air trapped
6. Press the [YES] key. inside piping before attempting to measure its
output (again).

M540 P.Output Check ? Y / N 11. Repeat steps 8 to 10 three times and obtain the
Press START key to Start average value.

12. Check the cursor is positioned on the “N1R” position,


enter (set) the average value on the screen using the
numeral keys.

5-13
5.5 Replenisher Pump Output

continued

<Example>

The figure below shows an example where an average value


of 60 ml is set.

N1R:60 N2R:50 N3R:50


NSR:50 N4R:50 (ml) ?
M541

13. Using the [YES] key, move the cursor from one
position to the next, and measure and set the outputs
for replenishers “N2R”, “N3R”, “NSR” and “N4R” by
following steps 8 to 12.

14. Verify the settings and press the [YES] key.

N1W:50 N2W:50
(ml) ?
M542

15. Measure and set the outputs for N1W and N2W by
following steps 8 to 12.

16. Verify the settings and press the [YES] key to move to
the “M007 Ready for Process-” screen, or press the
[MODE] key to return to the mode setting screen.

NOTE: If the solution is warming up, move to the


“M005 Solution Warming Up” screen when the
[YES] key is pressed.

5-14
5.6 Emergency Processing Mode

5.6.1 When the Processor Not 5.6.2 When the Processor Working
Working
Process films as they are, using the side with an active
An error message is displayed as follows (e.g. E411) in case sensor.
of sensor's abnormality.

E 4 1 1 L e f t 1 2 0 S e n s o r
A b n o r m a l Y

1. Open the loader cover.

2. Press the [YES] key.

• The error message is cleared.

3. Press the [MODE] key.

MOOB M o d e 0-9?

4. Press the [6] key while pressing the [MODE] key.

M600 Machine Condition


Setting 3 ? Y / N

5. Press the [YES] key.

M610 Emergency
Process Mode ? Y / N

6. Press the [YES] key.

M611 Press Start key for


Drive Compulsory Start Y

7. Press the [START] key.

• The processor drives.

8. Close the loader cover.

• Film can be processed.

NOTE: · Make sure to process films using the side


with an active sensor. When the left does not
work, use the right, and when the right vice
versa, or it's impossible to count the number
of every print, every replenisher processing
and film cutting.

5-15
5.7 Error Log

5.7.1 Error Log Verification


The error log screen displays up to 100 errors which have
occurred up to the present time together with the date and
time of each error occurrence.
When more than 100 errors have occurred, the oldest error is
automatically erased each time another error occurs.

1. Press the [MODE] key.

MOOB M o d e 0-9?

2. Press the [6] key while holding the [MODE] key down.

M600 Machine Condition


Setting 3 ? Y / N

3. Press the [SUB] and [2] keys.

M620 Error Log ?


Y / N

4. Press the [YES] key.

# E002 09/27 17:21


E004 09/26 17:15 Y
M621

<Example>

The above error log screen shows that the latest error (with
“#” mark) is E002 “N1 Replenisher Tank Empty” occurred at
17:21 on Sep 27.

5. Press the [YES] key to display the next errors and the
[BACK SHIFT] key to display the previous errors in
succession.

6. Press the [MODE] key to return to the mode setting


screen.

NOTE: The error log memory is cleared in the


maintenance service mode (see section 6.6).

5-16
5.8 Room Temperature and Humidity Check

5.8.1 Room Temperature and


Humidity Check
1. Press the [MODE] key.

MOOB M o d e 0-9?

2. Press the [6] key while holding the [MODE] key down.

M600 Machine Condition


Setting 3 ? Y / N

3. Press the [SUB] and [3] keys.

M630 Room Temperature/


Humidity ? Y / N

4. Press the [YES] key.

M631 Room Temp./Hum.


Temp. :24˚C Hum:35% RH Y

5. Check “Temp.” and “Hum.” and press the [YES] key.

NOTE: Press the [MODE] key to return to the mode


setting screen.

• “M007 Ready for Process-” screen is displayed.

NOTE: If the solution is warming up, “M005 Solution


Warming Up” screen is displayed.

5-17
6. MAINTENANCE SERVICE MODE

6.1 Menu Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

6.2 Processing Temperature Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10


6.2.1 Processing Temperature Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10

6.3 Temperature Correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12


6.3.1 Temperature Correction Factors Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12

6.4 Input Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13


6.4.1 Input Check Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13

6.5 Output Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15


6.5.1 Output Check Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15

6.6 Setting Data Saving, Reading and Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16


6.6.1 Setting Data Saving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
6.6.2 Stored Data Reading and Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16

6.7 Error Log Clear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18


6.7.1 Error Log Clear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18

6.8 Replenishment Control Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19


6.8.1 Replenishment Control Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19

6.9 IX240 Replenishment Factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20


6.9.1 IX240 Replenishment Factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20

6.10 Water Replenishment Log/Water


Replenishment Rate Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
6.10.1 Water Replenishment Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
6.10.2 Water Replenishment Rate Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21

6.11 Water Replenishment Condition Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22


6.11.1 DZP Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
6.11.2 Evaporation Rates (During Stand-by) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
6.11.3 Evaporation Rates (During Processing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
6.11.4 Evaporation Rates (During Power OFF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
6.11.5 Water Replenishment Rate Correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
6.11.6 Environmental Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
6.11.7 Room Temperature Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
6.11.8 Circuit Board Adjustments for Initial Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25

6-0
6.12 Demonstration Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
6.12.1 Demonstration Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26

6.13 Default Values/Hidden Running Total . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28


6.13.1 Data Resetting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
6.13.2 Default Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
6.13.3 Hidden Running Total . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29

6-1
6.1 Menu
6.1 Menu Table Table

MODE

MODE + YES

MODE + 7

Processing Temperature
Calibration
YES YES

Maintenance Mode 1
SUB 1

Temperature Correction
Value Check
SUB 2 YES

YES
Input Check Mode
SUB 3
BACK
SHIFT

YES YES

BACK BACK
SHIFT SHIFT

YES YES

BACK BACK
M738
SHIFT SHIFT

YES

MODE
BACK
SHIFT
M73C

1 2 3

6-2
YES MODE

M711 M712

YES

YES MODE

YES

YES YES

BACK BACK
M732
SHIFT SHIFT

YES YES

BACK BACK
M736 M737
SHIFT SHIFT

YES YES

BACK BACK
M73A
SHIFT SHIFT

MODE

M000
4

6-3
6.1 Menu Table

1 2 3

YES

YES
Output Check Mode
SUB 4
BACK
SHIFT

YES YES

BACK BACK
SHIFT SHIFT

YES

MODE
BACK
SHIFT
YES

M000
Setting Data Saving
SUB 5 YES

Stored Data YES


Reading and Loading
SUB 6
BACK
SHIFT

YES YES

BACK BACK
SHIFT SHIFT

YES YES

BACK BACK
SHIFT SHIFT

5 6

6-4
4

YES YES

BACK BACK
SHIFT SHIFT

YES YES

BACK BACK
SHIFT SHIFT

MODE

1:YES

1 YES

YES MODE
0:NO

YES YES

BACK BACK
SHIFT SHIFT

YES YES

BACK BACK
SHIFT SHIFT

1:YES

YES 1 YES

BACK YES
SHIFT 0:NO

6-5
6.1 Menu Table

5 6

MODE

MODE + 8

Error Log Clear


YES YES

Maintenance Mode 2
SUB 1

Replenisher Control Data


SUB 2 YES

YES MODE

M824

YES

IX240 Replenishment Factor


SUB 3 YES

MODE + 9

Water Replenishment
Log
YES YES

Maintenance Mode 3

SUB 1

Water Replenishment
Rate Measurement
SUB 2 YES

Evaporation Rates Settings


(During Stand-by)
SUB 3 YES

Evaporation Rates Settings


(During Processing)
SUB 4 YES

Evaporation Rates Settings


(During Power OFF)
SUB 5 YES

8 9

6-6
u

MODE

1 YES

0:NO 1:YES
YES

YES YES

M822

MODE

M831

YES

MODE

M911

START MODE

YES

MODE

M931

YES

MODE

M941

YES

MODE

M951

YES
10

6-7
6.1 Menu Table

8 9
Water Replenishment
Rate Correction
SUB 6 YES

Environmental Conditions
Settings
SUB 7 YES

Room Temperature Calibration YES

Demo. Mode ( )
* SUB 9 YES

YES YES

YES YES

YES YES

YES YES

YES YES

MODE

Hidden Running Total


SUB + 9 YES

NOTE (*): Demo Mode is available when DIP switch 8 (DS8) is ON.

6-8
10

MODE

YES

MODE

YES

MODE

M973

YES

YES YES

YES YES

YES YES

YES YES

YES YES

YES MODE

YES

YES MODE

YES MODE

6-9
6.2 Processing
6.2 Processing Temperature Calibration
Temperature Calibration

6.2.1 Processing Temperature Calibration

NOTE: Accurate calibration of the processing temperature is 8. Using the [YES] key, move the cursor from one
performed one hour after the “Ready for Processing” position to another, and measure and calibrate the
message appears. temperatures of the “N2”, “N3”, and “NS1” solutions by
following steps 6 and 7 above.
1. Press the [MODE] key.
Thermometer

MOOB Mode 0-9?

2. Press the [YES] key while holding the [MODE] key


down.

M010 Maitenance Mode


1-3? (Mode 7-9?)

3. Press the [7] key while pressing the [MODE] key. F489

9. Verify the settings and press the [YES] key.


M700 Maitenance Mode 1 ?
NOTE: When re-entering the values, do it by returning
Y / N
the cursor to each entering position before
pressing the [YES] key.
4. Press the [YES] key.

NS2:35.0 N4:35.0 (˚ C )
M710 Temperature
DRY:35.0 ?
Calibration ? Y / N
M712

5. Press the [YES] key. 10. Following steps 6 and 7, measure and calibrate the
temperatures of the “NS2”, “N4” solutions.

N1:38.0 N2:37.0 (˚ C ) 11. Move the cursor to “DRY” by pressing the [YES] key
twice.
N3:37.0 NS1:35.0 ?
M711 NOTE: Definition of dry temperature : On the FP232,
the dry temperature is the temperature
6. Open the processor cover, immerse a thermometer to recorded by the dry temperature detector
a depth of approximately 50 mm (2 in) behind the which minimizes the difference between the
processing rack (toward the dryer) in the N1 machines. This criterion is chosen because it
processing tank, and measure and record the solution is difficult to measure the dry temperature
temperature. accurately.

NOTE: The thermometer reading will fluctuate as the 12. Remove the heater cover (see subsection 11.3.2).
heater is turned on and off, but the average
value of the readings is considered to be the
actually measured temperature.

7. If the actually measured temperature and the


temperature displayed on the screen differ, rewrite the
displayed temperature for “N1” by entering the value
using the numeral keys, and press the [YES] key.

6-10
13. Remove the screw and the dry temperature detector. 17. If the actually measured temperature and the
temperature displayed on the screen differ, rewrite the
NOTE: Do not disconnect the harness connector. temperature displayed by entering the measured
temperature value using the numeral keys.
Dry Temperature Detector Screw
18. Verify the setting and press the [YES] key to move to
“M720 Temperature Correct?” screen or the [MODE]
key to return to the mode setting screen.

NOTE: When re-entering the values, do it by returning


the cursor to each entering position before
pressing the [YES] key.

19. Replace the removed parts in the reverse order of


removal.

F491

14. Prepare one liter of hot water (approximately 50 °C/


122 °F) in a container.

15. Immerse the tips of the dry temperature detector and a


thermometer in the water as shown.

Dryer Temperature Detector

Thermometer F490

16. Following steps 1 through 5 and 9 to verify the “DRY”


temperature.

NS2:35.0 N4:35.0 (˚ C )
DRY:35.0 ?
M712

6-11
6.3 Temperature
6.3 Temperature Correction Correction

6.3.1 Temperature Correction Factors Verification

The temperature correction screen is on the next page of the 6. Press the [YES] key.
maintenance mode selection screen.
When the processing temperature calibration (see subsection (Initial setting)
6.2.1) is performed, the temperature correction factors are
changed automatically.
If the circuit board replacement or data reset is required, M722 NS2: 0.0 N 4 : 0 . 0˚ C
record the temperature correction factors and enter the
Dry: 0.0 Y
corrected values (temperature correction factor + displayed
temperature) on the M711 and M712 screens (see subsection
6.2.1) after the replacement or data reset. This eliminates the (Example after calibration)
processing temperature calibration procedures.

NOTE: When performing “Temperature Correction” right after M722 NS2:+0.2 N 4 :- 0 . 2


“Processing Temperature Calibration (see subsection
Dry: -0.3 (˚C) Y
6.2.1), step 1 to 4 can be skipped.

1. Press the [MODE] key. 7. Press the [YES] key to move to “M730 Input Check?”
screen or the [MODE] key to return to the mode setting
screen.
MOOB Mode 0-9?

2. Press the [YES] key while holding the [MODE] key


down.

M010 Maitenance Mode


1-3? (Mode 7-9?)

3. Press the [7] key, while holding the [MODE] key down.

M700 Maitenance Mode 1 ?


Y / N

4. Press the [SUB] and [2] keys.

M720 Temperature
Correction ? Y / N

5. Press the [YES] key.

(Initial setting)

M721 N1: 0.0 N2: 0.0


(˚C) N3: 0.0 NS1: 0.0 Y

(Example after calibration)

M721 N1: +0.7 N2: -1.3


(˚C) N3: -1.4 NS1: -1.3 Y

NOTE: + or – signs are displayed before the


correction factors.

6-12
6.4 Input Checks

6.4.1 Input Check Mode

Sensor and detector function can be checked in the input NOTE: The dip switch numbers are allocated as
check mode. shown in the following.
Display the required Input Check screen by carrying out the
following steps :
DS ON OFF
Not used 1 - -
1. Press the [MODE] key.
Auto water
2 NA A
replenishment
MOOB Mode 0-9? Control strip auto cut 3 A NA
Room temp./
4 A NA
humid.detect
Not used 5 - -
2. Press the [YES] key while holding the [MODE] key Not used 6 - -
down. Not used 7 - -
Demo mode 8 A NA
M010 Maitenance Mode A : Applied
NA : Not applied
1-3? (Mode 7-9?)
6. Check the settings for “DS1” to “DS3” and press the
3. Press the [7] keys while pressing the [MODE] key. [YES] key.

M700 Maitenance Mode 1 ? DS-4:1 DS-5:0 DS-6:0

Y / N DS-7:0 DS-8:0 Y
M732
4. Press the [SUB] and [3] keys.
7. Check the settings for “DS4” to “DS8” and press the
[YES] key.
M730 lnput Check ?
Y / N M733 Film Senaor Check
RSE1:0 RSE2:0 RSE4:0 Y
NOTE: The “Input Check Mode” can not be selected
during driving the processor.
NOTE: The displayed symbols signify the following.
5. Press the [YES] key. RSE1: Right film sensor
RSE2: Right perforation sensor
RSE4: Right IX240 sensor
M731 DlP Switch Check
8. Check the settings for “RSE1”, “RSE2” and “RSE4”
DS-1:0 DS-2:0 DS-3:0 Y
and press the [YES] key.

NOTE: The displayed value “1” means “ON” and the


“0” means “OFF”. M734 LSE1:0 LSE2:0
LSE3:0 LSE4:0 Y

NOTE: The displayed symbols signify the following.


LSE1: Left film sensor
LSE2: Left perforation sensor
LSE3: Left 120 sensor
LSE4: Left IX240 sensor

6-13
6.4 Input Checks

continued

9. Check the settings for “LSE1” to “LSE4” and press the 14. Press the [YES] key.
[YES] key.

N1R:0 N2R:0 N3R:0 NSR:0


M735 Loading and Process
N4R:0 W1:0 W2:0 Y
Unit Detector Check Y
M73A

NOTE: The previous screen is returned when the NOTE: The displayed value “0” signifies “normal” and
[BACK SHIFT] key is pressed. the “1” signifies “abnormal”.

10. Press the [YES] key. 15. Press the [YES] key.

S1:0 S2:0 S3:0 M73B Working Tank Level


(STOP) (RPRES) (L P R E S ) Y Detector Check Y
M736
16. Press the [YES] key.
NOTE: The displayed symbols signify the following.
S1: Drive stop switch
S2: Right press roller operating position N1P:1 N2P:1 N3P:1
detector
NS1P:1 NS2P:1 N4P:1 Y
S3: Left press roller operating position
detector M73C

11. Press the [YES] key. NOTE: The displayed value “1” signifies “normal” and the “0”
signifies “abnormal”.

S4:0 S5:0 S6:1 17. Upon completion of the input check, press the [MODE]
key to return to the mode setting screen. Or press the
(RCUT) (LCUT) (L D R C ) Y
[YES] key to move to the “M740 Output Check”
M737 screen.

NOTE: The displayed symbols signify the following.


S4: Right cutter operating position
detector
S5: Left cutter operating position detector
S6: Loader cover detector

12. Press the [YES] key.

S7:1
(PRSC) Y
M738

NOTE: The displayed symbols signify the following.


S7: Processing section cover

13. Press the [YES] key.

M739 Replenisher & Waste


Tank Level Check Y

6-14
6.5 Output Checks

6.5.1 Output Check Mode

The function of the lamps, motors, solenoids, etc. can be 6. The previous screen is returned when the
checked in the output check mode. [BACK SHIFT] key is pressed, and every time the
Display the required Output Check screen by carrying out the [YES] key is pressed, the output check screens shown
following steps : below are displayed in succession.

1. Press the [MODE] key.


M742 Circulation Pump
[1:ON 0:OFF] 0?
MOOB Mode 0-9?

2. Press the [YES] key while holding the [MODE] key


down.
M743 Dryer Fan
[1:ON 0:OFF] 0?
M010 Maitenance Mode
1-3? (Mode 7-9?)

3. Press the [7] key while pressing the [MODE] key.

M744 Drive Motor


M700 Maitenance Mode 1 ?
[START :ON STOP:OFF] ?
Y / N

4. Press the [SUB] and [4] keys.

M740 Output Check ? M745 Auto Lock


Y / N [1:ON 0:OFF] 0?

NOTE: The “Output Check Mode” can not be selected


while driving.

5. Press the [YES] key.


M746 Cutter
[1:Right 2:Left 0:OFF] 0?
M741 Ready Lamp
[1:ON 0:OFF] 0?

M747 Press Roller


[1:Right 2:Left 0:OFF] 0?

M748 Cooling Fan


[1:Right 2:Left 0:OFF] 0Y

7. Upon completion of the output checks, press the [YES]


key to move to “M007 Ready for Process” screen.
Then, press the [MODE] key to return to the mode
setting screen.

6-15
6.6 Setting
6.6 Setting Data
Data Saving, Saving,
Reading and Loading Reading and Loading

6.6.1 Setting Data Saving 6.6.2 Stored Data Reading and


Loading
Each setting data can be saved with the following
procedures. After performing the processing temperature Each saved data can be loaded and can be copied to the
calibration, pump output calibration or the temperature main memory if necessary, with the following procedures.
settings has been changed, save the data by following these
steps. 1. Press the [MODE] key.

1. Press the [MODE] key.


MOOB Mode 0-9?

MOOB Mode 0-9?

2. Press the [YES] key while holding the [MODE] key


down.
2. Press the [YES] key while holding the [MODE] key
down.
M010 Maitenance Mode
1-3? (Mode 7-9?)
M010 Maitenance Mode
1-3? (Mode 7-9?)
3. Press the [7] key while holding the [MODE] key down.

3. Press the [7] key while holding the [MODE] key down.
M700 Maitenance Mode 1 ?

M700 Maitenance Mode 1 ? Y / N

Y / N
4. Press the [SUB] and [6] keys.

4. Press the [SUB] and [5] keys.


M760 Data Reading ?

M750 Data Saving ? EEPROM -> RAM Y / N

RAM -> EEPROM Y / N


5. Press the [YES] key.

5. Press the [YES] key.


M761 Last Data Saving

M751 Save Data ? Day 9 6 / 0 9 /2 7 Y

1:Tes 0:No 0?
6. The previous screen is returned when the [BACK
SHIFT] key is pressed, and every time the [YES] key is
6. When saving data, enter “1” (“Yes”) using the numeral pressed, the setting data reading screens shown
keys and press the [YES] key. below are displayed in succession.

M752 Data Saving M762 Set T e m p e r a t u r e (˚ C )


N1:38.0 N2G:37 NSG:35 Y

NOTE: When not saving data, enter “0” (“No”) using


the numeral keys and press the [YES] key.
“M007 Ready for Process-” screen is
displayed.
M763 135DRY:50 120DRY:60
SAVE:0.5 (˚ C ) Y

6-16
M764 Temp. Correction Y
N1:+0.7 N2:-1.3 N3:-1.4

M765 NS1:-1.3 NS2:+0.2 Y


N4:-0.2 2DRY:-0.3 ENV:-0.6

M766 Pump Output Data


N1:58 N 2 : 57 N 3 : 57 ( m l ) Y

M767 N1S:56 N4:58 (ml)


N1W:58 N2W:59 Y

M768 Repl. Count Date Y


N1:0274 N2:0616 N3:0411

M769 NS:0411 N4:0619


Y

M76A Load Backup Data ?


1: Y e s 0 : N o 0?

7. When copying data to the main memory, enter “1”


(“Yes”) using the numeral keys and press the [YES]
key.

NOTE: When not copying data, enter “0” (“No”) using


the numeral keys and press the [YES] key.
“M007 Ready for Process-” screen is
displayed.

6-17
6.7 Error
6.7 Error Log Clear
Log Clear

6.7.1 Error Log Clear

The error log containing up to 100 recorded errors can be


cleared by performing the following procedures:

1. Press the [MODE] key.

MOOB Mode 0-9?

2. Press the [YES] key while holding the [MODE] key


down.

M010 Maitenance Mode


1-3? (Mode 7-9?)

3. Press the [8] key while pressing the [MODE] key.

M800 Meintenance Mode 2 ?


Y / N

4. Press the [YES] key.

M810 Error Log Clear ?


Y / N

5. Press the [YES] key.

M811 Error Log Clear


1:Yes 0:No 0?

6. Using the numeral keys, enter “1” (“Yes”) and press


the [YES] key.

7. Check that the error log has been cleared (see


subsection 5.7.1), and press the [MODE] key to return
to the mode setting screen.

#OOO E000 MM/DD HH:MM


OOO E000 MM/DD HH:MM Y
M621

6-18
6.8 Replenishment Control Data

6.8.1 Replenishment Control Data

1. Press the [MODE] key. 9. Press the [YES] key to move to “M830 IX240
Replenishment Factor?” screen or the [MODE] key to
return to the mode setting screen.
MOOB Mode 0-9?

2. Press the [YES] key while holding the [MODE] key


down.

M010 Maitenance Mode


1-3? (Mode 7-9?)

3. Press the [8] key while holding the [MODE] key.

M800 Meintenance Mode 2 ?


Y / N

4. Press the [SUB] and [2] keys.

M820 Replenishment
Control Data ? Y / N

5. Press the [YES] key.

M821 Replenishment
Counter Y

6. Press the [YES] key.

N1:0124 N2:0466 N3:0261


NS:0261 N 4 :0 4 6 6 Y
M822

• The Replenisher counter counts down from the


replenishment count data to 0000, then the pump
starts replenishing.

7. Press the [YES] key.

M823 Replenishment
Count Date Y

8. Press the [YES] key.

N1:0274 N2:0616 N 3 :0 4 1 1
NS:0411 N4:0616 Y
M824

6-19
6.9 IX240 Replenishment Factor

6.9.1 IX240 Replenishment Factor

If the processing quality of IX240 film is changed, the IX240


Replenishment factor (replenishment ratio of IX240 films to
135 films) can be changed by performing the following
procedures:

1. Press the [MODE] key.

MOOB Mode 0-9?

2. Press the [YES] key while holding the [MODE] key


down.

M010 Maitenance Mode


1-3? (Mode 7-9?)

3. Press the [8] key while holding the [MODE] key down.

M800 Meintenance Mode 2 ?


Y / N

4. Press the [SUB] and [3] keys.

M830 IX240 Replenishment


Factor ? Y / N

5. Press the [YES] key.

N1:058 N2:069 N3:069


NS:069 N4:100 (%) Y
M831

6. Using the [YES] key, select the item to be changed by


moving the cursor, and set the factor using the
numeral keys.

7. Press the [YES] key to move to “M007 Ready for


Process” screen. Press the [MODE] key to return to
the mode setting screen or press the [SUB] key to
return to the sub mode setting screen.

6-20
6.10 Water Replenishment Log/Water Replenishment Rate Measurement

6.10.1 Water Replenishment Log 6.10.2 Water Replenishment Rate


Measurement
The water replenishment log containing up to 30
replenishment data can be displayed by performing the The water replenishment rate based on the latest
following procedures; replenishment data can be measured by preforming the
following procedures:
1. Press the [MODE] key.
1. Press the [MODE] key.

MOOB Mode 0-9?


MOOB Mode 0-9?

2. Press the [YES] key while holding the [MODE] key


down. 2. Press the [YES] key while holding the [MODE] key
down.

M010 Maitenance Mode


M010 Maitenance Mode
1-3? (Mode 7-9?)
1-3? (Mode 7-9?)
3. Press the [9] key while holding the [MODE] key down.
3. Press the [9] key while holding the [MODE] key down.

M900 Maintenance Mode 3 ?


M900 Maintenance Mode 3 ?
Y / N
Y / N
4. Press the [YES] key twice.
4. Press the [2] key while holding the [SUB] key down.

M910 Water Pump Log ?


M920 W. Pump Output ? Y / N
Y / N
Press START key to Start
5. Press the [YES] key.
5. Press the [YES] key.

Day P-val. TS TD TO Y
M921 N1W:0053 N2W:0023
# 30 / 0 8 . 3 / 0 0 5 7 / 0 0 4 5 / 1 3 3 8
(ml) NSR:0082 N4R:0044 Y
M911

NOTE: The displayed symbols signify the following. 6. Select the pump to be measured by moving the cursor
P-val : Steam pressure calculated from room using the [YES] key and press the [START] keys.
temperature/humidity map (mmHg)
TS : STANDBY (rack drive stop) time (min.)
TD : Drive time (min.) M922 N1W Pump is Running
TO : Stop (power off) time (min.)
027Sec
NOTE: “#” mark is displayed on the latest log
in formation. • The water replenish rate is measured and the
W.Pump Output data screen now appears.
6. Press the [YES] key.

• Every time the [YES] key is pressed, the next log M921 N1W:0053 N2W:0023
information is displayed in succession.
(ml) NSW:0082 N4W:0044 Y
NOTE: Every time the [BACK SHIFT] key is pressed,
the previous log information is displayed in
succession. 7. After moving the cursor to the “Y” position, press the
[YES] key to move to “M930 Evaporation (Stand-by)?”
7. Press the [MODE] key to return to the mode setting screen or press the [MODE] key to return to the mode
screen. setting screen or press the [MODE] key to return to the
mode setting screen.

6-21
6.11 Water
6.11 Water Replenishment
Replenishment Condition Settings Condition Settings

6.11.1 DZP Switch Settings 6.11.2 Evaporation Rates


(During Stand-by)
NOTE: When the system is shipped from the
manufacturing plant, the DIP switch-2 (DS-2)
Processing Standard evaporation rates during
is set to ON so that the water replenishment
solution stand-by
system will not operate. When the system has
just been installed, ensure that DS-2 is set to N1 6.7 ml/hour
OFF after the water replenishment conditions N2 6.4 ml/hour
have been set (see subsection 6.11.8). NS 11.9 ml/hour
N4 7.6 ml/hour

1. Press the [MODE] key.

MOOB Mode 0-9?

2. Press the [YES] key while holding the [MODE] key


down.

M010 Maitenance Mode


1-3? (Mode 7-9?)

3. Press the [9] key while holding the [MODE] key down.

M900 Maintenance Mode 3 ?


Y / N

4. Press the [SUB] and [3] keys.

M930 Evaporation ?
(Stand-by) Y / N

5. Press the [YES] key.

N1:06.7 N2:06.4 (ml/H)


NS:11.9 N4:07.6 ?
M931

6. Using the numeral keys, enter the “N1” evaporation


rates during stand-by.

NOTE: When the system has just been installed, the


standard evaporation rates during stand-by
listed above are set as the default values.

7. Use the [YES] key to move the cursor and enter the
“N2”, “NS” and “N4” evaporation rates in succession.

8. Verify the rate settings and press the [YES] key.

• “M940 Evaporation ? (Processing)” screen is


displayed.

6-22
6.11.3 Evaporation Rates 6.11.4 Evaporation Rates
(During Processing) (During Power OFF)

Processing Standard evaporation rates during Processing Standard evaporation rates during
solution processing solution Power OFF
N1 11.5 ml/hour N1 3.7 ml/hour
N2 11.1 ml/hour N2 2.4 ml/hour
NS 22.0 ml/hour NS 6.4 ml/hour
N4 16.5 ml/hour N4 3.1 ml/hour

1. Display the Evaporation (Processing) rate setting 1. Display the Evaporation (Power OFF) rate setting
screen (see subsection 6.11.2). screen (see subsection 6.11.3).

M940 Evaporation ? M950 Evaporation ?


(Processing) Y / N (Power-OFF) Y / N

2. Press the [YES] key. 2. Press the [YES] key.

N1:11.5 N2:11.1 (ml/H) N1:03.7 N2:02.4 (ml/H)


NS:22.0 N4:16.5 ? NS:06.4 N4:03.1 ?
M941 M951

3. Using the numeral keys, enter the “N1” evaporation 3. Using the numeral keys, enter the “N1” evaporation
rate during processing. rate during power OFF.

NOTE: When the system has just been installed, the NOTE: When the system has just been installed, the
standard evaporation rates during stand-by standard evaporation rates during power OFF
listed above are set as the default values. listed above are set as the default values.

4. Use the [YES] key to move the cursor and enter the 4. Use the [YES] key to move the cursor and enter the
“N2”, “NS” and “N4” evaporation rates in succession. “N2”, “NS” and “N4” evaporation rates in succession.

5. Verify the rate settings and press the [YES] key. 5. Verify the rate settings and press the [YES] key.

• “M950 Evaporation (power OFF) ?” screen is • “M960 water Replenishment Rate Correct ?” screen
displayed. is displayed.

6. Press the [SUB] key to return to the sub mode setting 6. Press the [SUB] key to return to the sub mode setting
screen or [MODE] key to return to the mode setting screen or [MODE] key to return to the mode setting
screen. screen.

6-23
6.11 Water Replenishment Condition Settings

6.11.5 Water Replenishment Rate 6.11.6 Environmental Conditions


Correction
1. Display the Environment condition setting screen (see
subsection 6.11.5).
Processing Standard water replenishment rates during
solution correction
N1 30 ml M970 Room Condition ?
N2 30 ml
NS 60 ml Y / N
N4 30 ml
2. Press the [YES] key.
1. Display the water Repl. Rate Correction setting screen
(see subsection 6.11.4).
M971 1:Auto 2:Normal

M960 Water Replenishment 3:Dry 4:Wet 1?

Rate Correct. ? Y / N
3. Using the numeral keys, select the environment
condition.
2. Press the [YES] key.
NOTE: When the system has just been installed, “1
(Auto)” is set as the default condition.
M961 N1:030 N2:030 (ml)
! CAUTION
NS:060 N4:030 ?
Always select “1 (Auto)” unless a special room
condition applies.
3. Using the numeral keys, enter the “N1” water
replenishment correction rate. 4. Press the [YES] key to move to “M972 Room
Temperature Calibration?” screen or press the [MODE]
NOTE: When the system has just been installed, the key to return to the mode setting screen.
standard water replenishment rate corrections
listed above are set as the default values.

4. Use the [YES] key to move the cursor and set the
“N2”, “NS” and “N4” correction rates in succession.

5. Verify the rate settings and press the [YES] key.

• “M970 Room Condition ?” screen is displayed.

6-24
6.11.7 Room Temperature Calibration 6.11.8 Circuit Board Adjustments for
Initial Installation
NOTE: When performing “Room Temperature Calibration”
right after “Environmental Conditions” (see NOTE: When the system is shipped from the manufacturing
subsection 6.11.6), step 1 can be skipped. plant, the DIP switch-2 (DS-2) is set to ON so that the
water replenishment system will not operate. When
1. Display the Room Temperature Calibration screen the system has just been installed, ensure that DS-2
(see subsection 6.11.6). is set to OFF by following the steps described below
after the water replenishment conditions have been
set.
M972 Room Temperature
1. Set the power switch to STANDBY, and the built-in
Calibration ? Y / N
circuit breaker and main power to OFF.

2. Press the [YES] key. 2. Remove the electrical equipment cover and discharge
capacitors C1 and C2 (see subsection 13.3.2).

Calib.:26.3 Corre.:-0.6 3. Set the DIP switch-2 (DS-2) on the CTL32 circuit board
from ON to OFF.
Disp.:26.9 (˚ C ) ?
M973 DIP Switch

3. Measure the temperature near the room temperature/


humidity detector with a thermometer.

CTL32 Circuit Board F486

4. Install the electrical equipment cover, and set the main


power, built-in circuit breaker and power switch to ON.
Room Temperature/Humidity Detector F601

4. Change the temperature in the Cal. Input column to


the actual temperature by entering the value using
numeral keys and press the [YES] key.

5. Press the [YES] key to return to “M007 Ready for


Process” screen. Press the [SUB] key to return to the
sub mode setting screen or the [MODE] key to return
to the mode setting screen.

6-25
6.12 Demonstration
6.12 Demonstration Mode Mode

6.12.1 Demonstration Mode

1. Turn the power switch to STANDBY, and the built-in 9. Press the [SUB] and [9] keys.
circuit breaker and the main power supply OFF.

2. Remove the electric equipment cover (see subsection M990 Demo. Mode ?
13.3.1).
Y / N
3. Turn the Dip switch (DS-8) on CTL32 circuit board to
ON. 10. Press [YES] keys.

DIP Switch
E000 Drain W1 Waste Tank
Y

11. Press the [YES] key.

• Every time the [YES] key is pressed, the screens


shown below are displayed in succession, and
operation returns to the “M007 Ready for Process”
screen.

E001 Drain W2 Waste Tank


CTL32 Circuit Board F486
Y
4. Replace the electric equipment cover.

5. Turn ON the main power supply and built-in circuit


breaker.

• Demo Mode begins. E002 N1 Replenisher


Tank Empty Y
FP232B Demo. Mode
Y

6. Press the [MODE] key.


E003 N2 Replenisher
Tank Empty Y
MOOB Mode 0-9?

7. Press the [YES] key while holding the [MODE] key


down.
E004 N3 Replenisher
Tank Empty Y
M010 Maitenance Mode
1-3? (Mode 7-9?)

8. Press the [9] key while pressing the [MODE] key down.

E005 NS Replenisher
M900 Maintenance Mode 3 ?
Tank Empty Y
Y / N

6-26
E006 N4 Replenisher E301 Left Lane 135 Film
Tank Empty Y Not Cut Check Y

E051 N1 Working Tank E304 Right Lane Film


Level Low Y Lengh Abnormal Y

E052 N2 Working Tank E305 Left Lane Film


Level Low Y Lengh Abnormal Y

E053 N3 Working Tank E400 Right Magazine


Level Low Y Guide Did Not Return Y

E055 NS1 Working Tank E401 Left magazine Guide


Level Low Y Did Not r eturn Y

E056 NS2 Working Tank E402 Rigth Perforation


Level Low Y Sensor Abnormal Y

E057 N4 Working Tank E403 Left Perforation


Level Low Y Sensor Abnormal Y

E300 Right Lane 135 Film M540 P. Output Check ? Y / N


Not Cut Check Y Press START key to Start

6-27
6.13 Default
6.13 Default Values/Hidden
Values/Hidden Running Total Running Total

6.13.1 Data Resetting 6.13.2 Default Values

Incorrect data in the CPU and RAM is cleared and the default Data Default
values in the ROM are set by conducting the following steps: Temperature setting N1 38.0 °C
37 °C
! CAUTIO
· These steps must be taken when replacing the CTL32
N2/N3
NS-1/NS-2/N4
DRY 110/126/
35 °C

circuit board after it has been mounted. Otherwise, the


processing solution temperatures, replenishment amounts, 135/240 50 °C
evaporation compensation parameters and other setting DRY 120 60 °C
condition data may be incorrect, which will cause the Temperature range setting for save mode 0.5°C, OFF
system to malfunction. Temperature N1 0
· After resetting, be sure to calibrate the temperatures calibration N2 0
(see subsection 6.2.1, 6.11.7) and set the replenisher N3 0
pump discharge volumes (see subsection 5.5.1). NS-1 0
Data resetting has the effect of clearing the temperature NS-2 0
sensor calibration parameters and replenisher pump
N4 0
discharge volume calibration values and, as a result, the
DRY 0
“heater temperature abnormal” error message may
appear. ENV 0
Replenishment rate N1 45.0 ml
1. Set the power switch to STANDBY. N2 20.0 ml
N3 30.0 ml
2. Set the power switch to ON while holding the [MODE] NS 30.0 ml
key and [SUB] key down at the same time. N4 20.0 ml
Replenisher pump N1 50 ml
• All the data is now rewritten to the default values. output N2 50 ml
N3 50 ml
3. Make sure that the buzzer sounds (approx. 3
NS 50 ml
seconds) while the version number appears.
N4 50 ml
! CAUTION Water replenisher N1W 50 ml
The following state represents data are reset pump output N2W 50 ml
imperfectly or data are not still reset. After verifying Replenisher count N1 274
that, reset data properly. data N2 616
N3 411
• The buzzer does not sound though the version NS 411
number appears. N4 616
(The buzzer should sound when data are reset.) Replenisher counter N1 274
N2 616
NOTE: If the data resetting is performed after the
N3 411
software version-up operation, the
NS 411
temperature sensor calibration parameters
N4 616
and other data stored on the CTL32 circuit
board are not cleared. No. of film rolls 135 0
So the data can be reloaded from the processed daily 110 0
EEPROM and used. 126 0
This eliminates the processing temperature 120 0
calibration. IX240 0
Total no. of film rolls 135 0
processed 110 0
126 0
120 0
IX240 0
Timer ON time, day 0, OFF
Preheat ON time 0, OFF
Clearing date for number of film rolls Day in question
processed
Water replenishment environment Auto
condition

6-28
6.13.3 Hidden Running Total

Data Default The hidden counter, different from the running total, can be
Evaporation (standby) N1 6.7 ml/h displayed by performing the following steps:
N2 6.4 ml/h
1. Press the [MODE] key.
NS 11.9 ml/h
N4 7.6 ml/h
Evaporation N1 11.5 ml/h MOOB Mode 0-9?
(processing) N2 11.1 ml/h
NS 22.0 ml/h
N4 16.5 ml/h
Evaporation N1 3.7 ml/h 2. Press the [2] key.
(power OFF) N2 2.4 ml/h
NS 6.4 ml/h
M200 Post-operational
N4 3.1 ml/h
Water replenishment N1 30 ml/h Check ? Y / N
rate correction N2 30 ml/h
NS 60 ml/h
3. Press the [9] key while holding the [SUB] key down.
N4 30 ml/h
Cumulative standby duration 0 min.
Cumulative processing duration 0 min. M290 Running Total ?
Cumulative power OFF duration 0 min.
Y / N
IX240 replenishment N1 58 %
factor N2 69 %
NS 69 % 4. Press the [YES] key.
N4 100 %

M291 135:#### 110:####


240:#### 120:#### Y

5. Press the [YES] key.

M292 126:#### ##/##/##


Clear 1:Yes O:No OY

NOTE: To start the running total display over again,


enter “1” (in response to “Clear”), and press
the [YES] key. This will clear all the displays
to zero.

M007 Ready for Process.


N 1 : 3 8 . 0˚ C

6. Press the [YES] key to return to “M007 Ready for


Process-” screen or press the [MODE] key to return to
the mode setting screen.

6-29
7. LOADER

Parts Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2

7.1 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3


7.1.1 E201 “Close Film Load Section Cover” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
7.1.2 E206 “Control Strip Not Cut, Check Cutter Unit” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
7.1.3 E300, E301 “# Lane 135 Film Not Cut, Check” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
7.1.4 E302, E303 “#. Film Cutting Fail or Mag. Guide Not Return.” . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
7.1.5 E304, E305 “# Lane Film Length Abnormal” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21
7.1.6 E306, E307, E308, E309, E311 “#. #Film Cut, Check Magazine” . . . . . . . . . . .
E320, E321 “# IX240 Film Cut Check Intermed. Ctrdg” . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23
7.1.7 E400, E401 “# Magazine Guide Did Not Return” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25
7.1.8 E402, E403 “# Perforation Sensor Abnormal”
E404, E405 “# Film Sensor Abnormal”
E411 “Left 120 Sensor Abnormal”
E412, E413 “# IX240 Sensor Abnormal” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27
7.1.9 E406, E407 “#. Perforation or Film Sensor Abnormal”
E409 “Left 120 or Film Sensor Abnormal”
E414, E415 “# IX240 or Film Sensor Abnormal” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29

7.2 Loader Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31


7.2.1 Input Check of Loader Cover Detector (S6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31
7.2.2 Output Check of Film Press Roller (SOL4/SOL5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31
7.2.3 Film Press Roller Solenoid (SOL4/SOL5)
and Safety Thermostat (TH5) Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32

7.3 Magazine Support Plate,


Loader Bottom Cover and Auto Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34
7.3.1 Output Check of Auto Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34
7.3.2 Magazine Support Plate Cover Removal/Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34
7.3.3 Loader Cover Detector (S6) Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35
7.3.4 Loader Bottom Cover Removal/Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36
7.3.5 Auto Lock Release Switch Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37
7.3.6 Auto Lock Release Switch (S11) Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38
7.3.7 Auto Lock Solenoid (SOL1) Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38

7-0
7.4 Cutter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40
7.4.1 Input Check of Press Roller and Cutter Operating Position Detectors . . . 7-40
7.4.2 Output Check of Cutter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40
7.4.3 Cutter Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41
7.4.4 Cutter Operating Position in Power Failure Detector Inspection . . . . . . . . 7-42
7.4.5 Press Roller Operating Position Detector (S2/S3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-42
7.4.6 Cutter Operating Position Detector (S4/S5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-43
7.4.7 Power OFF Cutter Operating Position Detector (S8/S9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-43
7.4.8 Cutter Solenoid (SOL2/SOL3) Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-44

7.5 Feeder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46


7.5.1 Input Check of Film Sensors (FMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46
7.5.2 Film Sensor (FMS) Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46
7.5.3 Loader Cover Interlock Detector (S10) Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-48
7.5.4 Feeding Roller Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-49

7-1
Parts Location
7.1 Troubleshooting

Left Power OFF Cutter Operating Right Power OFF Cutter


Position Detector (S9) Operating Position Detector (S8)

Right Press Roller Operating


Left Press Roller Operating Position Detector (S2)
Position Detector (S3)
Right Cutter Operating Position Detector (S4)

Film Press Roller Solenoids (SOL4/SOL5)

Magazine Guide

Left Cutter Operating Position Detector (S5)


Film Sensor (FMS)

Feeding Roller
Auto Lock Release Switch (S11)

Cutter Solenoids (SOL2/SOL3)

Auto Lock Solenoid (SOL1)

F563

7-2
7.1 Troubleshooting

7.1.1 E201 “Close Film Load Section Cover”

Trouble: The loader cover was opened while film was being inserted.

Yes
Was the auto lock release switch pressed
when the loader cover was opened?

No Close the loader cover.


The alarm and error message will be
automatically cleared.

If there is any film currently being processed,


wait until it comes out and the drive motor stops.

Set the power switch STANDBY/ON.


Proceed with “S6” with “input check” Yes
selected in the maintenance mode.
Is S6 set OFF/ON (see subsection 7.2.1)?

END
No

Turn the power switch to STANDBY, the


built-in circuit breaker and the power
distribution switch OFF.
Remove the magazine support plate
cover. (see subsection 7.3.2) Disconnect
the connector of the loader cover detector
(S6). Remove the electrical equipment
cover and discharge capacitors C1 and
C2 (see subsection 13.3.2).
Remove the CN7 connector on the CTL32
board. Then check the continuity between NG
the connectors.

CN7 BrBr
10 1
Repair or replace the harness.

5315

OK

To Next Page

B : Black O : Orange
S6: Loader cover detector Br : Brown P : Purple
Bu : Blue R : Red
G : Green W : White
: Action : Check
Gr : Gray Y : Yellow

7-3
7.1 Troubleshooting

continued

From Previous Page

Discharge capacitors C1 and C2


(see subsection 13.3.2).
Substitute a known good CTL32 board
(see subsection 13.3.3).

7-4
7.1.2 E206 “Control Strip Not Cut, Check Cutter Unit”

Trouble: During control strip processing the film sensor fails to go OFF within specified seconds after the cutter is operated.

Press the [YES] key to clear the alarm. Yes


Open the loader cover. Has the control
strip been cut?

No q

Cut the control strip with scissors and save the


rest. Wait for the control strip to appear in the
film leader collector.

Open the processing section cover. Set


the power switch STANDBY/ON. Proceed
with output check “cutter” (whichever the Yes
control strip is installed on) selected in the
maintenance mode. Is the sound of the
cutter operating heard?
(see subsection 7.4.2)

Is the cutter blade in good condition for cutting?


No
Yes
No
END

Turn the power switch to STANDBY, the


built-in circuit breaker and the power Replace the cutter blade (see subsection 7.4.3).
distribution switch OFF.
Remove the cutter guide
(see subsection 7.4.8).
Check the continuity between the NG
terminals of the solenoid connector.

Replace the cutter solenoid


(see subsection 7.4.8).
0340

OK

To Next Page

: Action : Check

7-5
7.1 Troubleshooting

continued

From Previous Page

Remove the electrical equipment cover


and discharge capacitors C1 and C2
(see subsection 13.3.2).
Disconnect the CN7 connector from the
PWA32/PWB32 board and check the
continuity between the cutter solenoid
connector and the CN27 connector. NG

O (Rh) Y (Lh)
CN27

W W
Repair or replace the harness.

0341

OK

Substitute a known good PWA32/PWB/32 Yes


board (see subsection 13.3.4).
Has the trouble been remedied?

No END

Discharge capacitors C1 and C2


(see subsection 13.3.2).
Substitute a known good CTL32 board
(see subsection 13.3.3).

Clean the film sensor with the blower brush.

B : Black O : Orange
Br : Brown P : Purple
Bu : Blue R : Red
G : Green W : White
: Action : Check
Gr : Gray Y : Yellow

7-6
Open the processing section cover. Set
the power switch STANDBY/ON. Proceed
Yes
with “input check film sensor check”
selected in the maintenance mode. Is the
film sensor set OFF/ON?
(see subsection 7.5.1)
END
No

Turn the power switch to STANDBY,


the built-in circuit breaker and the
power distribution switch OFF.
Disconnect the film sensor connector.
Remove the electrical equipment cover
and discharge capacitors C1 and C2
(see subsection 13.3.2).
Remove the CN8 connector on the
CTL32 board and check the continuity
between the CN8 connector and the
film sensor connector. NG
NOTE: When some wires are of the
same color, check the continuity
between each end of them.
Br
W GrBu Y R R

Repair or replace the harness.


B Br
Br
WGr Bu Y R R
17
CN8
B B B Br

5306

OK

Replace the film sensor Yes


(see subsection 7.5.2).
Has the trouble now been remedied?

No END

Discharge capacitors C1 and C2


(see subsection 13.3.2).
Substitute a known good CTL32 board
(see subsection 13.3.3).

7-7
7.1 Troubleshooting

7.1.3 E300, E301 “# Lane 135 Film Not Cut, Check”

Trouble: · The alarm will appear after the film sensor has been OFF. The cutter fails to operate even when the left-lane or right-lane
film being processed is 135 mm film.
· The cutter fails to operate when a film detection error occurs (Although the film being processed is IX240, 110 or 126, the
film sensor detects it as a 135 mm film).
· A 135 mm film is being processed using the 126 film magazine.

Press the [YES] key twice to clear the alarm and


error message.

Yes
Is the 126 film magazine used?

No END

Attach the emergency dark bag. Yes


Is there any partly-cut film left in the
loader?

No
Rewind the film into the film cartridge and
re-process.
Remove the dark bag and open the No
loader cover. Does the magazine guide
move smoothly?

Yes
Remove the foreign matter or other obstruction
so that the guide moves smoothly.

If there is any film currently being processed,


wait until it comes out and the drive motor stops.

E300 or E301 error may occur when the 135 damaged film rewound into the film cartridge for 120 is processed.

B : Black O : Orange
Br : Brown P : Purple
Bu : Blue R : Red
G : Green W : White
: Action : Check
Gr : Gray Y : Yellow

7-8
Is S4 or S5 mode to go OFF/ON with Yes
“input check” selected in the maintenance
mode? (see subsection 7.5.1)

No q

Turn the power switch to STANDBY, the


built-in circuit breaker and power
distribution switch OFF. Remove the
magazine support plate cover.
Disconnect the connector of the operating
position detector for the left or right cutter
(S4 or S5). Check the continuity between
the detector terminals while moving the
detector arm.
Is the detector set OFF/ON? No

S4 or S5

Replace the left or right cutter operating the


position detector (see subsection 7.4.6).

5318

Yes

Remove the electrical equipment cover


and discharge capacitors C1 and C2
(see subsection 13.3.2).
Disconnect the CN7 connector from the
CTL32 board and check the continuity
between the CN7 connector and the
cutter operating position detector NG
connector.

R (Rh)
O (Lh)
CN7
Repair or replace the harness.
1
10
R O
0349

OK

To Next Page

S4: Right cutter operating position detector


S5: Left cutter operating position detector

7-9
7.1 Troubleshooting

continued

From Previous Page

Substitute a known good CTL32 board


(see subsection 13.3.3).

Check out the output check “cutter”


(whichever is indicated in the error Yes
message) selected in the maintenance
mode. Is the sound of the cutter
operating heard? (see subsection 7.4.2)
END
No

Proceed with “output check” for the other No


cutter. Is the sound of the cutter
operating heard? (see subsection 7.4.2)

Yes Proceed to page 7-12 q

Turn the power switch to STANDBY, the


built-in circuit breaker and the power
distribution switch OFF.
Remove the cutter guide
(see subsection 7.4.8).
Check the continuity between the
connector terminals of the cutter solenoid
indicated in the error message. NG

Replace the cutter solenoid


(see subsection 7.4.8).

0340

OK

B : Black O : Orange
Br : Brown P : Purple
Bu : Blue R : Red
G : Green W : White
: Action : Check
Gr : Gray Y : Yellow

7-10
Remove the electrical equipment cover
and discharge capacitors C1 and C2
(see subsection 13.3.2).
Disconnect the CN27 connector from the
PWA32/PWB32 board. Check the
continuity between the cutter solenoid
connector and the CN27 connector.
NG

O (Rh) Y (Lh)

W W CN27
Repair or replace the harness.

0341

OK

Substitute a known good PWA32/PWB32 Yes


board (see subsection 13.3.4).
Has the trouble now been remedied ?

No END

Discharge capacitors C1 and C2


(see subsection 13.3.2).
Substitute a known good CTL32 board
(see subsection 13.3.3).

7-11
7.1 Troubleshooting

continued

From page 7-10 q

Has the end of the push rod for the loader


cover interlock detector been broken off?

Yes

Replace the push rod of the loader cover


interlock detector.
F609

No

Turn the power switch to STANDBY, the


built-in circuit breaker and the power
distribution switch OFF.
Remove the electrical equipment cover
and discharge capacitors C1 and C2
(see subsection 13.3.2). Remove the
interlock detector cover.
Disconnect the wires from the interlock
detector. Check the continuity between
the detector terminals while moving the No
detector arm.
Is the detector set OFF/ON?

Replace the cover interlock detector


(see subsection 7.5.3).

Interlock Detector
5319

Yes

7-12
Disconnect the CN29 connector from the
PWA32/PWB32 board and check the
continuity between the CN29 connector
and the connector of the interlock
detector.
NG
CN29

R R
R
R

Repair or replace the harness.


5320

OK

Substitute a known good PWA32/PWB32 Yes


board (see subsection 13.3.4).
Has the trouble now been remedied ?

No END

Discharge capacitors C1 and C2


(see subsection 13.3.2).
Substitute a known good CTL32 board
(see subsection 13.3.3).

B : Black O : Orange
Br : Brown P : Purple
Bu : Blue R : Red
G : Green W : White
: Action : Check
Gr : Gray Y : Yellow

7-13
7.1 Troubleshooting

7.1.4 E302, E303 “#. Film Cutting Fail or Mag. Guide Not Return.”

Trouble: The cutter operating position sensor fails to go OFF even though the left-lane or right-lane cutter has operated 3 times.

Press the [YES] key to clear the alarm.


Wait 45 seconds to prevent fogging of the film in
the loader.

No
Open the loader cover. Does the
magazine guide move smoothly?

Yes
Remove foreign matter or other obstruction so
that the guide moves smoothly.

No
Is the cutter blade installed properly?

Yes
Install the cutter blade properly.

Replace the cutter blade. No


Press the [YES] key. Does error E302 or
E303 recur?

Yes END

If there is any film currently being processed,


wait until it comes out and the drive motor stops.

S4: Right cutter operating position detector


S5: Left cutter operating position detector B : Black O : Orange
Br : Brown P : Purple
Bu : Blue R : Red
G : Green W : White
: Action : Check
Gr : Gray Y : Yellow

7-14
Open the processing section cover. Set
the power switch STANDBY/ON. Is S4 or Yes
S5 made to go OFF/ON with “input check”
selected in the maintenance mode?
(see subsection 7.4.1)
Proceed to page 7-16 1
No

Turn the power switch to STANDBY, the


built-in circuit breaker and the power
distribution switch OFF.
Remove the magazine support plate
cover.
Disconnect the connector of the left or
right cutter operating position detector (S4
or S5). Check the continuity between the
detector terminals while moving the
detector arm. Is the detector set No
OFF/ON?

S4 or S5

Replace the left or right cutter operating position


detector (see subsection 7.4.6).

5318

Yes

To Next Page

7-15
7.1 Troubleshooting

continued

From Previous Page

Remove the electrical equipment cover


and discharge capacitors C1 and C2
(see subsection 13.3.2).
Disconnect the CN7 connector from the
CTL32 board and check the continuity
between the cutter operating position
detector and the CN7 connector. NG

R (Rh)
O (Lh)
CN7
1 Repair or replace the harness.
R O 10
0349

OK

Substitute a known good CTL32 board


(see subsection 13.3.3).

Check out the output check “cutter”


(whichever is indicated in the error
Yes
message) selected in the maintenance
mode. Is the sound of the cutter
operating heard?
(see subsection 7.4.2)
END
No

B : Black O : Orange
Br : Brown P : Purple
Bu : Blue R : Red
G : Green W : White
: Action : Check
Gr : Gray Y : Yellow

7-16
Proceed with “output check” for the other No
cutter. Is the sound of the cutter
operating heard? (see subsection 7.4.2)

Proceed to 7-19 2
Yes

Turn the power switch to STANDBY, the


built-in circuit breaker and the power
distribution switch OFF.
Remove the cutter guide
(see subsection 7.4.8).
Check the continuity between the
connector terminals of the cutter solenoid
indicated in the error message. NG

Replace the cutter solenoid


(see subsection 7.4.8).

0340

OK

Remove the electrical equipment cover


and discharge capacitors C1 and C2
(see subsection 13.3.2).
Disconnect the CN27 connector from the
PWA32/PWB32 board. Check the
continuity between the cutter solenoid
connector and the CN27 connector.
NG
O (Rh) Y (Lh)

W W CN27
Repair or replace the harness.

0341

OK

To Next Page

7-17
7.1 Troubleshooting

continued

From Previous Page

Substitute a known good PWA32/PWB32 Yes


board (see subsection 13.3.4).
Has the trouble now been remedied ?

No END

Discharge capacitors C1 and C2


(see subsection 13.3.2).
Substitute a known good CTL32 board
(see subsection 13.3.3).

B : Black O : Orange
Br : Brown P : Purple
Bu : Blue R : Red
G : Green W : White
: Action : Check
Gr : Gray Y : Yellow

7-18
From page 7-17 2

Has the end of the push rod for the loader


cover interlock detector been broken off?

Yes

Replace the push rod of the loader cover


F609
interlock detector.

No

Turn the power switch to STANDBY, the


built-in circuit breaker and the power
distribution switch OFF.
Remove the electrical equipment cover
and discharge capacitors C1 and C2
(see subsection 13.3.2).
Remove the interlock detetor cover.
Disconnect the wires from the interlock
detector.
Check the continuity between the detector NG
terminals while moving the detector arm.
Is the detector set OFF/ON?

Replace the cover interlock detector


(see subsection 7.5.3).

Interlock Detector (S10)


5319

OK

To Next Page

7-19
7.1 Troubleshooting

continued

From Previous Page

Disconnect the CN29 connector from the


PWA32/PWB32 board and check the
continuity between the CN29 connector
and the connector of the interlock
detector.
NG
R R CN29

R
R
Repair or replace the harness.
5320

OK

Substitute a known good PWA32/PWB32 Yes


board (see subsection 13.3.4).
Has the trouble now been remedied ?

No END

Discharge capacitors C1 and C2


(see subsection 13.3.2).
Substitute a known good CTL32 board
(see subsection 13.3.3).

B : Black O : Orange
Br : Brown P : Purple
Bu : Blue R : Red
G : Green W : White
Gr : Gray Y : Yellow

7-20
7.1.5 E304, E305 “# Lane Film Length Abnormal”

Trouble: The length of the left-lane or right-lane film being processed is 1,787 mm (70.4 in).

Press the [YES] key to clear the alarm.

Wait until the film leader appears. Yes


Does only the film leader appear without
the film?

No Attach the emergency dark bag, cut the film


remaining in the loader using the cutter, rewind
the film back into its cartridge and re-process.

Clean the film detector with the blower brush.

If there is any film currently being processed,


wait until it comes out and the drive motor stops.

Open the processing section cover. Set


the power switch STANDBY/ON. Yes
Proceed with “input check film sensor
check” selected in the maintenance mode.
Is the film sensor set OFF/ON?
(see subsection 7.5.1)
END

No

To Next Page

: Action : Check

7-21
7.1 Troubleshooting

continued

From Previous Page

Turn the power switch to STANDBY, the


built-in circuit breaker and the power
distribution switch OFF.
Disconnect the film sensor connector.
Remove the electrical equipment cover
and discharge capacitors C1 and C2
(see subsection 13.3.2).
Disconnect the CN8 connector from the
CTL32 board and check the continuity
between the CN8 connector and the film
sensor connector. NG
NOTE: When some wires are of the same
color, check the continuity
between each end of them.
Br
W GrBu Y R R

B Br Repair or replace the harness.


Br
WGr Bu Y R R
17 1
CN8
B B B Br

5306

OK

Replace the film sensor Yes


(see subsection 7.5.2).
Has the trouble now been remedied?

No END

Discharge capacitors C1 and C2


(see subsection 13.3.2).
Substitute a known good CTL32 board
(see subsection 13.3.3).

B : Black O : Orange
Br : Brown P : Purple
Bu : Blue R : Red
: Action : Check G : Green W : White
Gr : Gray Y : Yellow

7-22
7.1.6 E306, E307, E308, E309, E311 “#. #Film Cut, Check Magazine”
E320, E321 “# IX240 Film Cut Check Intermed. Ctrdg”
Trouble: The cutter operates when the left-lane or right-lane film being processed is not 135 film.

No
Is the film not 135 film?

Yes

Press the [YES] key twice to clear the


alarm and error message. Open the No
loader cover. Is there any film left
inside the film magazine or the
intermediate carrtridge?

Yes

Take out the film remaining in the magazine


inside the dark box. Pack it into the film
magazine for re-processing.
CAUSE: Exposure to water, adhesion caused by
film tape, fault of reverse winding, and
insufficient winding.

Clean the film sensor with the blower brush.

If there is any film currently being processed,


wait until it comes out and the drive motor stops.

Proceed with “input check film sensor


check” selected in the maintenance mode. Yes
Is the film sensor set OFF/ON?
(see subsection 7.5.1)

No

END
To Next Page

ALS5: Magazine support plate detector

: Action : Check

7-23
7.1 Troubleshooting

continued

From Previous Page

Turn the power switch to STANDBY, the


built-in circuit breaker and the power
distribution switch OFF.
Disconnect the film sensor connector.
Remove the electrical equipment cover
and discharge capacitors C1 and C2
(see subsection 13.3.2).
Disconnect the CN8 connector from
CTL32 board and check the continuity
between the CN8 connector and the film
sensor connector. NG
NOTE: When some wires are of the same
color, check the continuity
between each end of them.
Br
W GrBu Y R R

Repair or replace the harness.


B Br
Br
WGr Bu Y R R
17 1
CN8
B B B Br

5306

OK

Replace the film sensor Yes


(see subsection 7.5.2).
Has the trouble now been remedied?

No END

Discharge capacitors C1 and C2


(see subsection 13.3.2).
Substitute a known good CTL32 board
(see subsection 13.3.3).

B : Black O : Orange
Br : Brown P : Purple
Bu : Blue R : Red
G : Green W : White
Gr : Gray Y : Yellow

7-24
7.1.7 E400, E401 “# Magazine Guide Did Not Return”

Trouble: The left or right press roller operating position detector remains ON for 5 seconds or more.

Press the [YES] key to clear the alarm.


Wait 45 seconds to prevent fogging of the
film in the loader.

No
Open the loader cover. Does the
magazine guide move smoothly?

Yes Inspect the magazine guide for damaged


springs and obstruction by foreign matter, and
repair or remedy.

If there is any film currently being processed,


wait until it comes out and the drive motor stops.

Open the processing section cover.


Set the power switch STANDBY/ON. Yes
Is the “S2” (right) or “S3” (left) sensor
made to go OFF/ON with “input check”
selected in the maintenance mode?
(see subsection 7.4.1)
END
No

To Next Page

S2: Right press roller operating position detector


S3: Left press roller operating position detector

: Action : Check

7-25
7.1 Troubleshooting

continued

From Previous Page

Turn the power switch to STANDBY, the


built-in circuit breaker and the power
distribution switch OFF.
Remove the magazine support plate
cover and then disconnect the connector
of the left or right press roller operating
position detector.
Check the continuity between the
terminals while moving the detector arm. NG

Replace the detector (see subsection 7.4.5).

0367

OK

Remove the electrical equipment cover


and discharge capacitors C1 and C2
(see subsection 13.3.2).
Disconnect the CN7 connector from the
CTL32 board and check the continuity
between the CN7 connector and the
detector connectors. NG

10 1 Repair or replace the harness.


CN7
F610

OK

Substitute a known good CTL32 board


(see subsection 13.3.3).

B : Black O : Orange
Br : Brown P : Purple
Bu : Blue R : Red
G : Green W : White
Gr : Gray Y : Yellow

7-26
7.1.8 E402, E403 “# Perforation Sensor Abnormal”
E404, E405 “# Film Sensor Abnormal”
E411 “Left 120 Sensor Abnormal”
E412, E413 “# IX240 Sensor Abnormal”
Trouble: The sensor indicated in the message has been set ON when the [START] key is pressed to start the drive.

Press the [YES] key to clear the alarm.

Is there possibility that the film is at Yes


the film sensor after power failure has
been recovered?

No Yes Feed the film into the processor with the


crank handle. Has the trouble now been
remedied?

No
Clean the film sensor with the blower brush.
END

If there is any film currently being processed,


wait until it comes out and the drive motor stops.

Open the processing section cover.


Set the power switch STANDBY/ON.
Proceed with “input check film sensor Yes
check” selected in the maintenance
mode. Is the film sensor set OFF/ON?
(see subsection 7.5.1)
END
No

To Next Page

: Action : Check

7-27
7.1 Troubleshooting

continued

From Previous Page

Turn the power switch to STANDBY,


the built-in circuit breaker and the
power distribution switch OFF.
Disconnect the film sensor connector.
Remove the electrical equipment cover
and discharge capacitors C1 and C2
(see subsection 13.3.2).
Disconnect the CN8 connector from the
CTL32 board and check the continuity
between the CN8 connector and the
film sensor connector. NG
NOTE: When some wires are of the
same color, check the continuity
between each end of them.
Br
W GrBu Y R R

Repair or replace the harness.


B Br
Br
WGr Bu Y R R
17 1
CN8
B B B Br

5306

OK

Replace the film sensor Yes


(see subsection 7.5.2).
Has the trouble now been remedied?

END
No

Discharge capacitors C1 and C2


(see subsection 13.3.2).
Substitute a known good CTL32 board
(see subsection 13.3.3).

B : Black O : Orange
Br : Brown P : Purple
Bu : Blue R : Red
G : Green W : White
Gr : Gray Y : Yellow

7-28
7.1.9 E406, E407 “#. Perforation or Film Sensor Abnormal”
E409 “Left 120 or Film Sensor Abnormal”
E414, E415 “# IX240 or Film Sensor Abnormal”
Trouble: · The perforation sensor is ON although the left-lane or right-lane film sensor is OFF during operation.
· The 120 sensor is ON although the left film sensor is OFF during operation.
· The IX240 sensor is ON although the left-lane or right-lane film sensor is OFF during operation.

Press the [YES] key to clear the alarm.

Wait 7 minutes to prevent fogging of the film


while it is being fed out by the loader.
Press the auto lock release switch and open the
loader cover.

Clean the film sensor with the blower brush.

If there is any film currently being processed,


wait until it comes out and the drive motor stops.

Open the processing section cover.


Set the power switch STANDBY/ON.
Proceed with “input check film sensor Yes
check” selected in the maintenance mode.
Is the film, perforation, 120 or IX240
sensors set OFF/ON? (see subsection
7.5.1) END

No

To Next Page

: Action : Check

7-29
7.1 Troubleshooting

continued

From Previous Page

Turn the power switch to STANDBY, the


built-in circuit breaker and the power
distribution switch OFF.
Disconnect the film sensor connector.
Remove the electrical equipment cover
and discharge capacitors C1 and C2
(see subsection 13.3.2).
Disconnect the CN8 connector from the
CTL32 board and check the continuity
between the CN8 connector and the film NG
sensor connector.
NOTE: When some wires are of the
same color, check the continuity
between each end of them.
Br
W GrBu Y R R
Repair or replace the harness.

B Br
Br
WGr Bu Y R R
17 1
CN8
B B B Br

5306

OK

Replace the film sensor Yes


(see subsection 7.5.2).
Has the trouble now been remedied?

No END

Discharge capacitors C1 and C2


(see subsection 13.3.2).
Substitute a known good CTL32 board
(see subsection 13.3.3).

B : Black O : Orange
Br : Brown P : Purple
Bu : Blue R : Red
G : Green W : White
Gr : Gray Y : Yellow

7-30
7.2 Loader Cover

7.2.1 Input Check of Loader Cover 7.2.2 Output Check of Film Press
Detector (S6) Roller (SOL4/SOL5)
1. Display the Input Check “S6” screen 1. Display the Press Roller output check screen (see
(see subsection 6.4.1). subsection 6.5.1).

M737
2. Open the loader cover.
2. Try opening and closing the loader cover. If the right or left press roller output system is
If detector S6 is operating properly, its display will operating properly, the right or left press roller will
change from 0 (OFF; open) to 1 (ON; close). operate for 1 second when the [1] or [2] key is pressed
and will not operate when the [0] key is pressed.
Loader Cover
Film Press Rollers

Detector (S6) F570


F611

7-31
7.2 Loader Cover

7.2.3 Film Press Roller Solenoid (SOL4/SOL5) and Safety Thermostat (TH5)
Replacement
Removal 7. Disconnect the connector of the film press roller
solenoid.
1. Turn the power switch to STANDBY, and the built-in
circuit breaker and main power supply OFF.

2. Open the loader cover.

3. Remove the cover stay arm E-ring and rest the loader
cover on the processor side.

Cover Stay Arm

F428

8. Remove the two screws and the press roller bracket


from the loader cover.

E-ring F426

4. Remove the screw securing the harness clamp.

5. Remove the two screws and remove the interlock


detector cover.

6. Cut the cord tie securing the harnesses.

Cord Tie Harness Clamp/Screw

Screws F429

9. Remove the safety thermostat by removing the two


screws.

Screws (2) Inter Lock Detector Cover Safety Thermostat Screws (2)
F427 F431

7-32
10. Remove the E-ring and take out the press roller, spring
and plain washers.

11. Remove the nut and the solenoid.

Spring Press Roller E-ring

Solenoid Washer Nut F430

Installation

Bear in mind the cautionary notes given below and install the
parts in the reverse order of their removal.

NOTE: · Install the harness in such a way that it will not be


subjected to unnecessary force when the loader
cover is opened or closed.
· Connect the R marked connector to the right press
roller solenoid and the L marked connector to the
left press roller solenoid.

7-33
7.3 Magazine
7.3 Magazine Support Support Plate,Cover
Plate, Loader Bottom Loader
and AutoBottom
Lock Cover and Auto Lock

7.3.1 Output Check of Auto Lock 7.3.2 Magazine Support Plate Cover
Removal/Installation
1. Display the Auto Lock output check screen
(see subsection 6.5.1). Removal
1. Turn the power switch to STANDBY, and the built-in
circuit breaker and main power supply OFF.

2. Open the loader cover.

2. If the auto lock output system is operating properly, the 3. Remove the right and left cutter covers by removing
auto lock solenoid will operate for 1 second when the the two screws.
[1] key is pressed and will be turned OFF when the
[0] key is pressed. Left Cutter Cover Right Cutter Cover
The solenoid operation can be checked by movement
of the auto lock lever.

NOTE: The figure shows the condition that the


magazine support plate cover is removed.

Auto Lock Lever

Screws (2) F419

4. Remove the magazine holder by removing the two


screws.

5. Remove the magazine support plate cover by


removing the four screws.
Auto Lock Solenoid F612

Screws (2) Magazine Holder

Screws (4) Magazine Support Plate Cover F421

7-34
7.3.3 Loader Cover Detector (S6)
Replacement
6. Disconnect the harness connector of the loader cover
detector and remove the magazine support plate Removal
cover.
1. Remove the magazine support plate cover
Loader Cover Detector Connector (see subsection 7.3.2).

2. Remove the two mounting screws, and remove the


loader cover detector.

Loader Cover Detector

Magazine Support Plate Cover F422

Installation
Install the parts in the reverse order of their removal. Magazine Support Plate Cover F613

NOTE: Take care not to catch the harness on the other parts.
Installation

Install the parts in the reverse order of their removal.

7-35
7.3 Magazine Support Plate, Loader Bottom Cover and Auto Lock

7.3.4 Loader Bottom Cover Removal/Installation

Removal 5. Disconnect the solenoid connector and grounding wire,


and remove the loader bottom cover.
1. Remove the electrical equipment cover and discharge
capacitors C1 and C2 (see subsection 13.3.2). ! CAUTION
Take care not to damage the wires when
2. Remove: disconnecting the connector.

· Control panel (see subsection 13.2.3).


· Magazine support plate cover (see subsection 7.3.2). Connector

3. Remove the E-ring securing the loader cover stay arm


and rest the cover on the processor side.

Cover Stay Arm

F442

Installation
Install the parts in the reverse order of their removal.
E-ring F426

4. Remove the five screws securing the loader bottom


cover.

Loader Bottom Cover

F457

7-36
7.3.5 Auto Lock Release Switch Inspection

1. Actuate the auto lock solenoid by conducting the auto 5) If the switch is operating normally, remove the
lock output check (see subsection 7.3.1). electrical equipment cover and discharge
capacitors C1 and C2 (see subsection 13.3.2).
2. Press the auto lock release switch. If the auto lock Inspect the continuity between the CN27
solenoid is released, the auto lock release switch is connector of the PWA32/PWB32 circuit board and
operating normally. the switch connector.
If there is no continuity, repair or replace the
• If the solenoid is not released, inspect the auto lock harness.
release switch by following the steps described
below.

1) Turn the power switch to STANDBY, and the built-


in circuit breaker and main power supply OFF.

2) Remove the magazine support plate cover


CN27
(see subsection 7.3.4).

3) Disconnect the connectors from the auto lock


release switch. Red

White
4) While setting the auto lock release switch from
ON to OFF, check the continuity between the
switch terminals.
If continuity results with the switch OFF and does 5394

not result with the switch ON, the switch is


operating normally. 6) If the harness is operating normally, try replacing
If the switch is defective, replace it. the PWA32/PWB32 circuit board (see subsection
(see subsection 7.3.6). 13.3.4).

Switch Terminals Auto Lock Release Switch F614

7-37
7.3 Magazine Support Plate, Loader Bottom Cover and Auto Lock

7.3.6 Auto Lock Release Switch (S11) 7.3.7 Auto Lock Solenoid (SOL1)
Replacement Replacement
Removal Removal
1. Remove the loader bottom cover 1. Remove the loader bottom cover (see subsection
(see subsection 7.3.4). 7.3.4).

2. Remove the screw, and remove the auto lock switch. 2. Remove the solenoid bracket by removing the four
screws securing the latch.
3. Disconnect the blue and white wires from the switch. Solenoid Bracket Screws (4)
Wires Screw

Latch F445
Auto Lock Switch F443

3. Disconnect the wires from the switch.


4. Loosen the lock nut and remove the switch button and
bracket. 4. Remove the spring from the lock hook.
Switch Button
5. Remove the solenoid by removing the screw.
Solenoid Switch Wires

Bracket Lock Nut F444

Installation Spring Screw F446

Install the parts in the reverse order of their removal. 6. Remove the lock nut, nut, screw and the hook.
Lock Hook Lock Nut Nut

Screw F447

7-38
Installation

Install the solenoid in the reverse order of removal.

7-39
7.4 Cutter
7.4 Cutter

7.4.1 Input Check of Press Roller and 7.4.2 Output Check of Cutter
Cutter Operating Position
Detectors 1. Display the Cutter output check screen (see
subsection 6.5.1).
1. Display the Input Check “S2/S3” or “S4/S5” screen
(see subsection 6.4.1).

2. Close the loader cover.


If the right or left cutter output system is operating
M736
properly, the sound of the right or left cutter operating
will be heard for 0.3 sec. when the [1] or [2] key is
pressed and will not be heard when the [0] key is
pressed.

M737

NOTE: The input symbols signify the following.


S2: Right press roller operating position
detector
S3: Left press roller operating position
detector
S4: Right cutter operating position detector
S5: Left cutter operating position detector

2. Open the loader cover and try moving the left or right
magazine guide by hand.
If the detectors are operating properly, they will change
from 0 (OFF) to 1 (ON) when pressed.

Magazine Guides F569

Magazine Guides

F576

7-40
7.4.3 Cutter Blade Replacement

Removal Installation

1. Turn the power switch to STANDBY, and the built-in Installation is essentially in the reverse order of removal,
circuit breaker and main power supply OFF. nothing the following.

2. Remove the electrical equipment cover and discharge NOTE: Align the holder fulcrum boss with the hole in the
capacitors C1 and C2 (see subsection 13.3.2). cutter base.

3. Remove the magazine support plate cover (see Holder


subsection 7.3.2).

4. Remove the right and left cutter blades and holders by


removing the two screws.

Holder (2)

Hole Fulcrum Boss F425

Screws (2) F423

5. Remove the cutter blade from the holder by removing


the screw.

Holder

Cutter Blade F424

7-41
7.4 Cutter

7.4.4 Cutter Operating Position in 7.4.5 Press Roller Operating Position


Power Failure Detector Detector (S2/S3)
Inspection
Removal
1. Turn the power switch to STANDBY, and the built-in 1. Remove:
circuit breaker and main power supply OFF.
· Magazine support plate cover (see subsection 7.3.2).
2. Remove the electrical equipment cover and discharge · Loader bottom cover (see subsection 7.3.4).
capacitors C1 and C2 (see subsection 13.3.2).
2. Disconnect the wires from the detector.
3. Disconnect the CN29 connector from the PWA32/
PWB32 circuit board. 3. Remove the detector by removing the two screws.

4. Open the loader cover and while pressing down on the Detector (S3) Detector (S2) Screws (2)
magazine guide with the fingers, check the continuity
between the wire terminals of the CN29 connector.

Right magazine guide : Orange-Orange


Left magazine guide : Yellow-Yellow

If there is continuity when the magazine guide is


pressed and no continuity when it is released, the
cutter operating position in the power failure detector is
operating normally.

Screws (2) Wires Wires


F448

Orange Installation
Orange
Install the detector in the reverse order of removal.
Yellow

CN29

Yellow

5395

If there is a continuity problem, inspect the wires for


open or short-circuit and the switch for continuity, and
repair or replace as required.

5. As in step 4, while pressing down on the left magazine


guide, inspect the continuity between the orange wire
terminals.

6. Install the electrical equipment cover.

7-42
7.4.6 Cutter Operating Position 7.4.7 Power OFF Cutter Operating
Detector (S4/S5) Position Detector (S8/S9)
Removal Removal
1. Remove: 1. Remove:

· Magazine support plate cover (see subsection 7.3.2). · Magazine support plate cover (see subsection 7.3.2).
· Loader bottom cover (see subsection 7.3.4). · Loader bottom cover (see subsection 7.3.4).

2. Disconnect the wires from the detector. 2. Remove the detector bracket by removing the two
screws.
3. Remove the detector by removing the two screws.

Screws (2) Detector (S5) Detector (S4)


Screws (2) Bracket

F450
Wires Screws (2) Wires
F449

3. Disconnect the wires from the detector.


Installation
4. Remove the detector by removing the two screws and
Install the detector in the reverse order of removal. nuts.

Detector (S8) Screws (2) Wires

Detector (S9) Wires


F451

Installation

Install the detector in the reverse order of removal.

7-43
7.4 Cutter

7.4.8 Cutter Solenoid (SOL2/SOL3) Replacement

Removal 5. Remove the cutter solenoid bracket by removing the


two screws securing the grounding wires, and two flat
1. Remove: head screws.

· Magazine support plate cover (see subsection 7.3.2). Cutter Solenoid Bracket Flat Head Screws (2)
· Loader bottom cover (see subsection 7.3.4).
· Cutter blades (see subsection 7.5.3).

2. Remove the detector bracket by removing the two


screws.

Screws (2) Bracket

Screws (2) Grounding Wires (2)


F453

6. Disconnect wires CL and CR from the detectors.

CL CR
F450

3. Remove the magazine guide bracket by removing the


three screws.

4. Remove three screws, then remove the cutter guide


and spacer.

Screws (3) Cutter Guide

F454

7. Open the wire clamp.

8. Remove the solenoid by removing the four screws.

Solenoid Screws (4)

Screws (3) Magazine Guide Bracket


F452

Clamp
F455

7-44
9. Remove the lock nut, washer, collars, three plastic
washers, bolt and arm from the solenoid.

Arm Plastic Washers (3) Bolt

Lock Nut Washer Collars (2) F456

Installation

Install the solenoid in the reverse order of removal.

7-45
7.5 Feeder
7.5 Feeder

7.5.1 Input Check of Film Sensors 7.5.2 Film Sensor (FMS) Replacement
(FMS)
Removal
1. Display the Input Check <Film Sensor> screen
1. Turn the power switch to STANDBY, and the built-in
(see subsection 6.4.1).
circuit breaker and main power supply OFF.

2. Remove:

· Magazine support plate cover (see subsection 7.3.2).


· Loader bottom cover (see subsection 7.3.4).
M733
· Cutter blades (see subsection 7.4.3).

3. Remove the E-ring securing the loader cover stay arm


and rest the loader cover on the processor side.

M734
Cover Stay Arm

NOTE: The input symbols signify the following.


RSE1 : Right film sensor
RSE2 : Right perforation sensor
RSE4 : Right IX240 sensor
LSE1 : Left film sensor
LSE2 : Left perforation sensor
LSE3 : Left 120 film sensor
LSE4 : Left IX240 sensor

2. Open the loader cover, insert sheets of paper between


the sensors and check whether the corresponding
display goes from 0 (OFF) to 1 (ON). If the sensors E-ring F426
are functioning properly, “1” will appear when a sheet
is inserted and “0” will appear when it is withdrawn.
4. Remove the screw securing the harness clamp.
Left Film Sensor
5. Remove the interlock detector cover by removing the
two screws.

Screw/Clamp Interlock Detector Cover

Sheet of Paper
F567

Screws (2)
F458

LSE4 LSE1 LSE2 LSE3 RSE4 RSE1 RSE2

7-46
6. Remove the loader left cover by removing the two 9. Remove the film sensor cover by removing the two
screws. screws.

Loader Left Cover Film Sensor Cover

Screws (2) F435 Screws (2) F608

7. Remove the cutter guide and spacer by removing the 10. Loosen the two screws securing the leader guide.
three screws.
11. Disconnect the connector (812-107) and remove the
Cutter Guide film sensor by removing the two screws.

Screws (2) (Remove)

Screws (2)
F436

Screws (2) (Loosen) Connector (812-107)


8. Remove the film sensor bracket by removing the two F438

flat head screws.


12. Remove the sensor LEDs by removing the two screws.
Screws
Sensor LEDs

Film Sensor Bracket F437


Screws (2)
F439

Installation

Install the film sensor in the reverse order of removal.

7-47
7.5 Feeder

7.5.3 Loader Cover Interlock Detector (S10) Replacement

Removal 7. Disconnect the wires from the detector.

1. Turn the power switch to STANDBY, and the built-in


circuit breaker and main power supply OFF.

2. Open the loader cover.

3. Remove the E-ring securing the loader cover stay arm


and rest the loader cover on the processor side.

Cover Stay Arm

Wires F434

Installation

Install the detector in the reverse order of removal.

E-ring F426

4. Remove the screw securing the harness clamp.

5. Remove the interlock detector cover by removing the


two screws.

Screw/Clamp Interlock Detector Cover

Screws (2)
F458

6. Remove the interlock detector by removing the two


screws.

7-48
7.5.4 Feeding Roller Replacement

Removal Installation

1. Remove the film sensor bracket (see subsection Install the feeding roller in the reverse order of removal.
7.5.2).
NOTE: Apply thread locking agent to the hex. socket head
2. Remove the two springs from the chain tensioner. set screw.

Springs (2) THREAD LOCKING AGENT: LOCKTITE 425 or


equivalent

F339

3. Remove the feeding roller.

Feeding Roller

F440

4. Loosen the hex. socket head set screw and remove


the sprocket, collar and bearing.

5. Remove the bearing by removing the E-ring.

Hex. Socket Head Set Screw Bearing E-ring

Sprocket Collar Bearing F441

7-49
8. PROCESSOR

Parts Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2

8.1 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3


8.1.1 E200 “Close Processing Section Cover” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
8.1.2 E204 “Urgently Close Processing Cover” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
8.1.3 E207 “Open Processing Section Cover” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7

8.2 Crossover Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9


8.2.1 Disassembly/Assembly of Crossover Rack No.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
8.2.2 Disassembly/Assembly of Crossover Racks No.2 to No.4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
8.2.3 Disassembly/Assembly of Crossover Rack No.5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11

8.3 Processing Racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12


8.3.1 Processing Rack Belt/Roller Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12

8.4 Processing Section Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14


8.4.1 Input Check of Processing Section Cover Detector (S7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
8.4.2 Processing Section Cover Detector Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
8.4.3 Processor Ventilation Fan Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15

8-1
Parts Location
8.1 Troubleshooting

Processing Section Cover Sensor Processing Ventilation Fan

Crossover Racks
No.1 No.2 No.3 No.4 No.5

N4

Processing Racks NS-1 NS-2


N2

N1 N3

F564

8-2
8.1 Troubleshooting

8.1.1 E200 “Close Processing Section Cover”

Trouble: An attempt was made to start processing even though the processor cover is still open.

Was an attempt made to start processing Yes


even though the processor cover was
open?

No Close the processor cover.


The alarm and error messages are automatically
cleared.
Set the power switch STANDBY, then
turn it ON.
Proceed with S7 in “input check” selected
in the maintenance mode. Yes
(see subsection 6.4.1)
Move the arm of the processing cover
detector using a screwdriver or suitable
rod. Check the push rod for the processing cover
Is S7 set OFF/ON? detector for damage.

No

Turn the power switch to STANDBY, built-


in circuit breaker and power distribution
switch OFF.
Remove the electrical equipment cover,
and discharge capacitors C1 and C2
F571
(see subsection 13.3.2).
Disconnect the CN33 connector from the
PWA32/PWB32 board. Check the
continuity between the detector terminals
while moving the detector arm with a
screwdriver or suitable rod. Yes
Is the detector set ON/OFF?

Processing
section cover O Yes
Substitute a known good PWA32/PWB32
detector 1 board (see subsection 13.3.4).
Has the trouble now been remedied?
4

O No
S7 CN33
5312

No Discharge capacitors C1 and C2


(see subsection 13.3.2).
Substitute a known good CTL32 board
(see subsection 13.3.3).
To Next Page

END

B : Black O : Orange S7 : Processing section cover detector


Br : Brown P : Purple
Bu : Blue R : Red
: Action : Check G : Green W : White
Gr : Gray Y : Yellow

8-3
8.1 Troubleshooting

continued

From Previous Page

Remove the processing section cover


detector (see subsection 8.4.2).
Check the continuity between the detector
terminal.
Is the detector set OFF/ON ?
No

Replace the processing section cover detector


Processing Section Cover Detector (see subsection 8.4.2).
5313

Yes

Check the harness for continuity between the


CN33 and the detector and repair.

O O

OO
1
4
CN33

5314

: Action : Check

8-4
8.1.2 E204 “Urgently Close Processing Cover”

Trouble: The processing section cover was opened during operation.


Operation stops while the processing section cover is open.

Yes
Was the processing section cover opened
during operation?

No Close the processing section cover.


The alarm and error message are automatically
cleared.

Yes
Is the dryer exit roller turning?

No
If there is any film currently being processed
wait until it comes out and drive motor stops.

Rotate the manual drive handle until all the films


come out from the processor.

Open the processing section cover. Set


the power switch STANDBY then turn it
ON. Proceed with “S7” with the “input Yes
check” selected in the maintenance mode
(see subsection 6.4.1).
Move the arm of the processing cover
detector using a screwdriver or suitable
Check the push rod for the processing cover
rod. Is S7 set OFF/ON?
detector for damage.
No

To Next Page

F571

S7 : Processing section cover detector

8-5
8.1 Troubleshooting

continued

From Previous Page

Turn the power switch to STANDBY, the


built-in circuit breaker and the power
distribution switch OFF.
Remove the electrical equipment cover
and discharge capacitors C1 and C2
(see subsection 13.3.2).
Disconnect the CN33 connector from the
PWA32/PWB32 board. Check the
continuity between the detector terminals Yes
while moving the detector arm.
Is the detector set OFF/ON?
Processing Section O
Cover Detector
Substitute a known good PWA32/PWB32 Yes
board (see subsection 13.3.4). Has the
4 1 trouble now been remedied?
CN33

O
S7
No
5312

No
Discharge capacitors C1 and C2
(see subsection 13.3.2).
Substitute a known good CTL32 board
Remove the processing section cover (see subsection 13.3.3).
detector (see subsection 8.4.2).
Check the continuity between the detector
terminals.
Is the detector set OFF/ON? END
No

S7

Replace the processing section cover detector


Processing Section Cover Detector (see subsection 8.4.2).
5313

Yes

Check the harness for continuity between the


CN33 and the detector and repair or replace.

O O

OO
1
4 CN33

5314

B : Black O : Orange
Br : Brown P : Purple
Bu : Blue R : Red
: Action : Check G : Green W : White
Gr : Gray Y : Yellow

8-6
8.1.3 E207 “Open Processing Section Cover”

Trouble: The processing section cover was closed when the power switch was set STANDBY upon completion of the work or in any
other circumstance.

Yes
Is the processor cover closed?

No
Open the processing section cover.
The power is automatically switched off.

Turn the power switch ON. Press the [YES] key


twice to clear the alarm and error message.

Proceed with “S7” with the “input check” Yes


selected in the maintenance mode. Is S7
set OFF/ON (see subsection 6.4.1)?

END
No

Turn the power switch to STANDBY, the


built-in circuit breaker and the power
distribution switch OFF.
Remove the electrical equipment cover
and discharge capacitors C1 and C2
(see subsection 13.3.2).
Disconnect the CN33 connector from the
PWA32/PWB32 board. Check the
continuity between the detector terminals Yes
on the CN33 while moving the detector
arm. Is the detector set OFF/ON?

Processing Section O
Cover Detector Substitute a known good PWA32/PWB32 Yes
board (see subsection 13.3.4). Has the
4 1 trouble now been remedied?

O
S7 CN33 NO

5312

No Discharge capacitors C1 and C2


(see subsection 13.3.2).
Substitute a known good CTL32 board
(see subsection 13.3.3).
To Next Page

END

B : Black O : Orange S7 : Processing section cover detector


Br : Brown P : Purple
Bu : Blue R : Red
G : Green W : White
Gr : Gray Y : Yellow

8-7
8.1 Troubleshooting

continued

From Previous Page

Remove the processing section cover


detector (see subsection 8.4.2).
Check the continuity between the detector
terminals.
Is the detector set OFF/ON?
No

S7

Replace the processing section cover detector


Processing Section Cover Detector (see subsection 8.4.2).
5313

Yes

Check the harness between the CN33 and the


detector and repair or replace.
Check the continuity of the harness and repair or
replace where necessary.

O O

OO
1
4
CN33

5314

: Action : Check

8-8
8.2 Crossover Rack

8.2.1 Disassembly/Assembly of 8.2.2 Disassembly/Assembly of


Crossover Rack No.1 Crossover Racks No.2 to No.4
Disassembly Disassembly
IMPORTANT: 1. Remove the crossover rack.
Take care not to damage the roller.

1. Remove crossover rack No.1.

Crossover Rack No.1.

No.2 No.3 No.4 F277

2. Exit Roller (Black) Replacement.


F275

1) Remove the C-rings, bearings, and gears.


2. Loosen the roller shaft, draw it out and remove the
roller. Bearings (2)

Roller

Gears (2) C-rings (2) F278

Shaft F276 2) Remove the roller by opening the bearing sections


by hand.

Assembly Bearing Section

Assemble the parts in the reverse order of disassembly.

Roller F279

8-9
8.2 Crossover Rack

continued

3. Drive Gear Shaft Replacement 2) Remove the roller from the shaft.

1) Remove the gear holder by removing the two Shaft Bearings (2)
screws.

Screws (2)

Roller Roller F283

Gear Holder
Assembly
F280

Assemble the parts in the reverse order of disassembly.


2) Remove the C-rings, bearings, gears and shaft.

Shaft Bearings (2) Gear

C-rings (2) Gear F281

4. Entrance Roller (Gray) Replacement

1) Remove the roller and bearings by opening the


bearing sections.

Roller Bearings (2)

F282

8-10
8.2.3 Disassembly/Assembly of Crossover Rack No.5

Disassembly 3. Upper Turn Roller and Guide Replacement

1. Remove crossover rack No.5. 1) Remove the squeegee rollers.

Crossover Rack No.5 2) Remove the guide and rollers by removing the E-
ring and shaft.

E-ring Rollers (2) Shafts (2)

F284

2. Squeegee Roller Replacement


Rollers (2) Upper Turn Guide F287

1) Remove the spring and two screws.


4. Entrance Roller Replacement

1) Remove the C-ring and withdraw the roller shaft.

C-ring

Spring Screws (2) F285

2) Remove the brackets, bearings and squeegee Roller Shaft


rollers. F288

Brackets (2) 2) Remove the roller and bearings.

Shaft C-ring Roller

Squeegee Rollers Bearings (4) F286

Bearings (2) F289

Assembly

Assemble crossover rack No.5 in the reverse order of


disassembly.
8-11
8.3 Processing
8.3 Processing Racks Racks

8.3.1 Processing Rack Belt/Roller Replacement

Disassembly 4. Remove the front and rear guides by removing the


screws (N1 and N3: three screws, N2, NS-1 and NS-2:
NOTE: · Screws not required for removal must not be two screws) on the sprocket side.
loosened.
· The explanation figures herein are mainly based on Rear Guide
the N1 rack.

1. Remove and wash the rack.

2. Remove the bottom turn guide by removing the four


screws.

Bottom Turn Guide

Screws (N1, N3: three screws,


Front Guide N2, NS-1 and NS-2, N4: two screws)
F294

<N4 Rack>

3. Remove the four squeegee roller springs and four


screws securing each side plate.

Screws (4) F292

<Racks Except N4>

3. Remove the side plate by removing the screws (N1


and N3: six screws, N2, NS-1 and NS-2: four screws)
on the opposite side of the sprocket.

Side Plate

Screws (4) Springs (2) F300

Screws (N1, N3: six screws,


N2, NS-1 and NS-2, N4: four screws) F293

Springs (2) Screws (4) F299

8-12
4. Remove the opposite side plate of the sprocket side, 6. Disassemble the roller.
squeegee rollers, bearings, and front and rear guides.
Roller Tubes Roller Flanges Roller
Rear Guide Front Guide

Roller Shaft F297


Squeegee Rollers Bearings (8) Side Plate F301

NOTE: The N4 rack uses the rubber tubes with burls


<All Racks> for the bottom roller.

5. Remove the belt and roller. Roller Tubes Roller

Belt

Roller Flanges Roller Shaft F302

Roller F295 Assembly


Assemble the processing racks in the reverse order of
disassembly.

NOTE: Face the upper chamfer of the guide to the IN side


and lower chamfer to the OUT side.

Upper

Lower Guide F296

8-13
8.4 Processing
8.4 Processing Section Cover Section Cover

8.4.1 Input Check of Processing 8.4.2 Processing Section Cover


Section Cover Detector (S7) Detector Replacement
1. Display the Input Check screen for S7 (see subsection Removal
6.4.1).
1. Open the processing section cover.

2. Remove the two screws, and remove the detector


bracket.

M738 Screws (2)

2. Try opening and closing the processing section cover.


It the signal system of the processing section cover
detector is operating properly, the S7 display will
change from 0 (OFF; Open) to 1 (ON; Close).

Processing Section Cover

Detector Bracket F303

3. Disconnect the wires from the detector.

4. Remove the two screws, and remove the detector from


the bracket.

F571
Detector Screws (2)

Wires F304

Installation

Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.

8-14
8.4.3 Processor Ventilation Fan Replacement

Removal Installation

1. Turn the power switch to STANDBY, and the built-in Install the parts in the reverse order of removal, noting the
circuit breaker and the main power supply OFF. following.

2. Open the processing section cover. NOTE: Install the fan with “ AIR FLOW” mark facing to the
processing section cover so that air can flow from the
3. Remove the four screws, and remove the fan cover. processor section to the outside.

Fan Cover

Screws (4) F305 “ AIR FLOW” Mark F307

4. Disconnect the harness connector from the fan.

5. Remove the three screws, and remove the fan from


the cover.

Cover

Screws (3) F306

8-15
9. PROCESSING SOLUTION CIRCULATION SYSTEM

Parts Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2

9.1 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3


9.1.1 E000, E001 “Drain W# Waste Tank” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
9.1.2 E051, E052, E053, E055, E056, E057 “W# Working Tank Level Low” . . . . 9-5
9.1.3 E500, E501, E502, E504, E505, E506
“N# Temperature Sensor Abnormal” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
9.1.4 E600, E601, E604 “Heater (N#) Abnormal” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
9.1.5 E608 “Working Heater Overheated” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13
9.1.6 E700, E701, E702, E704, E705, E706 “N# Temperature Abnormal” . . . . . 9-20
9.1.7 E905 “Control Data Abnormal. Reset Data” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26

9.2 Subtank Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27


9.2.1 Input Check of Processing Solution Level Detector (N1P to N4P) . . . . . . 9-27
9.2.2 Detector Protection Cover Removal/Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28
9.2.3 Processing Solution Level Detector Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28
9.2.4 Solution Temperature Detector Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29

9.3 Cooling Fan and Circulation Pump Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30


9.3.1 Output Check of Circulation Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30
9.3.2 Output Check of Processing Solution Cooling Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30
9.3.3 Circulation Pump Section Cover Removal/Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31
9.3.4 N1 Cooling Fan (F1) Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31
9.3.5 NS-1/NS-2/N4 Cooling Fan (F3) Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32
9.3.6 N1 Radiator Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32
9.3.7 Safety Thermo-Switch (TH1 to TH3) Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33
9.3.8 Processing Solution Heater (H1, H2, H3) Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33
9.3.9 Circulation Pump (P1) Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34

9.4 Waste Solution Tank Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37


9.4.1 Input Check of Waste Solution Level Detectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37
9.4.2 Waste Solution Level Detector Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37

9-1
Parts Location
9.1 Troubleshooting

N3 NS-1 NS-2 N4 Processing Tank

N2
N1
NS/N4 Heater

Subtank

NS/N4 Cooling Fan

N1 Heater

N2/N3 Heater

N1 Cooling Fan

Waste Solution
N1 Radiator Level Detector

Circulation Pump

Drain Valves W1 Waste Tank W2 Waste Tank

F562

9-2
9.1 Troubleshooting

9.1.1 E000, E001 “Drain W# Waste Tank”

Trouble: The level detector of the waste solution tank, which is checked once every 5 minutes, is now ON.

NOTE: After the error message is displayed twice continuously, the error message can not be cleared unless the waste solution is
discharged.

Waste solution has overflowed.


Press the [YES] key twice to clear the alarm and
error message.

Recycle the waste solution in the waste solution


tank.

Drain off the waste solution into the waste No


recovery tank.
Does the error recur after 5 minutes?

Yes
END

Press the [YES] key to clear the alarm.


If there is any film currently being processed,
wait until it comes out and the drive motor stops.

Is the waste solution level detector (in W1 Yes


or W2) float trapped or caught by
something?

Free or disengage the waste solution level


detector.

No

To Next Page

: Action : Check

9-3
9.1 Troubleshooting

continued

From Previous Page

Is W1 or W2 found to be problem-free
Yes
with “Level Detector” selected for the
maintenance mode input chedk
(see subsection 9.4.1)?

No
END

Turn the power switch to STANDBY, the


built-in circuit breaker and the power
distribution switch OFF.
Disconnect the connector of the waste
solution level detector and check the
continuity while moving the float up and
down. Is the sensor repeatedly set OFF
and ON?

Waste Solution Level Detector No

Replace the waste solution level detector


(see subsection 9.4.2).

F124

Yes

Remove the electrical section cover,


discharge capacitors C1 and C2
(see subsection 13.3.2).
Disconnect the CN4 connector from the
CTL32 board and inspect the continuity
between the CN4 connector and the
NG
waste solution level detector connector.

W (W2)

Bu (W1) CN4
Repair or replace the harness.

W (W2)
Bu (W1)
5300

OK

Substitute a known good CTL32 board


(see subsection 13.3.3).

B : Black O : Orange
Br : Brown P : Purple
Bu : Blue R : Red
: Action : Check G : Green W : White
Gr : Gray Y : Yellow

9-4
9.1.2 E051, E052, E053, E055, E056, E057 “W# Working Tank Level Low”

Trouble: One of the solution level detectors in the processing tanks is set OFF continuously for 1 second while the processor is not
driving.
One of the solution level detectors in the processing tanks is set OFF continuously for 5 seconds while the processor is driving.

NOTE: Clear the error message after stopping the processor drive. It can not be cleared while driving even if the solution level is
corrected.

Press the [YES] key to stop the alarm.

If there is any film currently being


processed, wait until it comes out and the No
drive motor stops. Inspect the levels of
the solutions in all the processing tanks.
Is the level low in any of the tanks?
Remove the level detector of the low-level
Yes
Yes tank and free the level detector float
(NOTE). Press the [YES] key. Does the
error recur ?

No
No
Has any processing solution collected in
the machine pan?

Yes No Natural evaporation may have occurred.


Pour more deiorized water into the
processing tank. Press the [YES] key.
Does the error recur?

Yes

END
Inspect for leaks in the processing tank
hoses and joints and repair. Drain off the
solution which has collected in the machine No
pan and recycle it in the waste recovery
tank. Pour more solution into the tank.
Press the [YES] key. Does the error recur ?

Yes

To Next Page

NOTE : Remove the float and move it up and down to inspect float for trapping or improper operation due to trapped air.

9-5
9.1 Troubleshooting

continued

From Previous Page

Turn the power switch to STANDBY, the


built-in circuit breaker and the power
distribution switch OFF.
Disconnect the connector of the level
detector and check the continuity while
moving the float up and down.
Is the detector repeatedly set OFF and
ON? No

Replace the tank level detector


(see subsection 9.2.3).
Tank Level Detector
5302

Yes

Remove the electrical section cover and


discharge capacitors C1 and C2
(see subsection 13.3.2). NG
Disconnect the CN10 connector from the
CTL32 board and inspect the continuity
between the CN10 connector and the
tank level detector connector.

OK Repair or replace the harness.

Discharge capacitors C1 and C2


(see subsection 13.3.2).
Substitute a known good CTL32 board
(see subsection 13.3.3).

B : Black O : Orange
Br : Brown P : Purple
Bu : Blue R : Red
: Action : Check G : Green W : White
Gr : Gray Y : Yellow

9-6
9.1.3 E500, E501, E502, E504, E505, E506 “N# Temperature Sensor Abnormal”

Trouble: · The readout temperature for N1 is 38.0 ± 0.2˚C ± even though the setting temperature range is 51.1˚C (124.0°F)
· The readout temperature for N2 to N4 is 51.1˚C even though the setting temperature range is 37 ± 3˚C (for N2 and N3) or
35 ± 3˚C (for NS1, NS2 and N4).

Press the [YES] key to clear the alarm.


If there is any film currently being processed,
wait until it comes out and the drive motor stops.

Open the processing section cover.


Set the power switch to STANDBY and then
back to ON again to clear the alarm and error
message.

Have the “processing temperature setting”


(see subsection 5.3.1) and “processing No
temperature calibration”
(see subsection 6.2.1) been carried out
properly?

Yes
Set properly.

Turn the power switch to STANDBY, the


built-in circuit breaker and the power
distribution switch OFF.
Open the replenisher supply port cover
and remove the detector protection cover.
Disconnect the connector from the
temperature detector and check the
continuity between the connector NG
terminals on the detector side.

Replace the temperature detector


(see subsection 9.2.4).

5323

OK

To Next Page

9-7
9.1 Troubleshooting

continued

From Previous Page

Remove the electrical section cover and


discharge capacitors C1 and C2
(see subsection 13.3.2).
Disconnect the CN3 connector from the
CTL32 board and check the continuity
between the CN3 connector and the
temperature detector connector.

CN3 Connector Detector


1 and 2 N1
3 and 4 N2
5 and 6 N3
Not used (7 and 8) – NG
9 and 10 NS-1
11 and 12 NS-2
13 and 14 N4
15 and 16 DRY
Repair or replace the harness.
CN3
(N1) 2 1 (N1)

16 15

5324

OK

Substitute a known good CTL32 board


(see subsection 13.3.3).

: Action : Check

9-8
9.1.4 E600, E601, E604 “Heater (N#) Abnormal”

Trouble: The temperature rise of the heater during warm-up (until the temperature setting is reached) is 1 ˚C (1.8 ˚F) or less over a
period of 10 minutes.

Press the [YES] key to clear the alarm.

Yes
Is the E608 displayed?

No Proceed to Subsection 9.1.5 for E608

If there is any film currently being processed,


wait until it comes out and the drive motor stops.

Open the processing section cover.


Set the power switch to STANDBY and then
back to ON again.

No
Does the processing solution recirculate?

Yes
Check the recirculation pump system.

Have the “processing temperature setting”


(see subsection 5.3.1) and “processing No
temperature calibration” (see subsection
6.2.1) been carried out properly?

Yes
Set properly.

To Next Page

9-9
9.1 Troubleshooting

continued

From Previous Page

Measure the actual solution temperature


Yes
using a thermometer. Has the
temperature risen 1 ˚C (1.8 ˚F) or more in
10 minutes?

No Proceed to page 9-12


qDefect in temperature detector system

Turn the power switch to STANDBY, the


built-in circuit breaker and the power
distribution switch OFF.
Remove the circulation pump section
cover (see subsection 9.3.3) and remove
the harness duct cover located below the
fans.
Disconnect the heater connector, and NG
check the continuity of the heater
(between the white lines).

W W

Replace the heater (see subsection 9.3.8).

5326

OK

B : Black O : Orange
Br : Brown P : Purple
Bu : Blue R : Red
: Action : Check G : Green W : White
Gr : Gray Y : Yellow

9-10
Remove the electrical section cover and
discharge capacitors C1 and C2
(see subsection 13.3.2).
Disconnect the CN21 connector from the
PWA32/PWB32 board and check the
continuity between the CN21 connector
and the heater connector.

CN21 connector Heater


Red (1 and 5) N1 NG
Brown (2 and 6) N2/N3
Blue (3 and 7) NS-1/NS-2/N4

CN21
4 8
Repair or replace the harness.

1 5

5327

OK

Substitute a known good PWA32/PWB32 Yes


board (see subsection 13.3.4).
Has the trouble now been remedied?

No END

Discharge capacitors C1 and C2


(see subsection 13.3.2).
Substitute a known good CTL32 board
(see subsection 13.3.3).

9-11
9.1 Troubleshooting

continued
From page 9-10
qDefect in temperature detector system

Turn the power switch to STANDBY, the


built-in circuit breaker and the power
distribution switch OFF.
Open the sub-tank section cover and
detector protection cover
(see subsection 9.2.2). Disconnect the
temperature detector connector and
check the continuity between the NG
connector terminals on the detector side.

Replace the temperature detector


(see subsection 9.2.4).

5323

OK

Remove the electrical section cover and


discharge capacitors C1 and C2
(see subsection 13.3.2).
Disconnect the CN3 connector from the
CTL32 board and check the continuity
between the CN3 connector and the
temperature detector connector.

CN3 Connector Detector


1 and 2 N1
3 and 4 N2
5 and 6 N3
Not used (7 and 8) –
9 and 10 NS-1 NG

11 and 12 NS-2
13 and 14 N4
15 and 16 DRY
CN3 Repair or replace the harness.
(N1) 2 1 (N1)

16 15

5324 END

OK

Substitute a known good CTL32 board


(see subsection 13.3.3).

: Action : Check

9-12
9.1.5 E608 “Working Heater Overheated”

Trouble: Some of the safety thermo-switches for the heaters 1, 2 or 3 are activated.

Press the [YES] key to clear the alarm.

If there is any film currently being processed,


wait until it comes out and the drive motor stops.

Open the processing section cover.


Set the power switch to STANDBY and then
back to ON again to clear the alarm and error
message.

Measure the actual solution temperature


Yes
using a thermometer. Has the
temperature risen 1 ˚C (1.8 ˚F) or more in
10 minutes?

No Proceed to page 9-16


qDefect in cooling system

Turn the power switch to STANDBY.


Remove the circulation pump section
cover (see subsection 9.3.3). No
Wait until the aluminum heater surface
temperature drops below 40 ˚C (104˚F).*
Turn the power switch ON.
Is the E608 displayed again?
END
Yes

To Next Page

* Safety thermo-switch open temperature : 64° ± 3 °C (148° ± 5.4°F); close temperature : 42° ± 3 °C (108° ± 5.4°F)

9-13
9.1 Troubleshooting

continued

From Previous Page

Turn the power switch to STANDBY, the


built-in circuit breaker and the power
distribution switch OFF.
Remove the connector cover of the safety
thermo-switch and disconnect the switch
terminals.
Check the continuity between the
terminals.

NOTE: All of the thermo-switches for N1, NO CONTINUITY


N2/N3, and NS-1/NS-2/N4 must
be checked.

Replace the safety thermo-switch


(see subsection 9.3.7).

5331

CONTINUITY EXISTS

Remove the electrical section cover and


discharge capapsitors C1 and C2
(see subsection 13.3.2).
Disconnect the CN33 connector from the
PWA32/PWB32 board and check the
continuity between the CN33 connector
and the safety thermo-switch connector.

CN33 connector Thermo-switch for :


5 and 6 N1 heater
NG
7 and 8 N2/N3 heater
9 and 10 NS-1/NS-2/N4 heater

CN33 Repair or replace the harness.


10 1
R R
R R

5332

OK

: Action : Check

9-14
Substitute a known good PWA32/PWB32 Yes
board (see subsection 13.3.4).
Has the trouble now been remedied?

No END

Discharge capacitors C1 and C2


(see subsection 13.3.2).
Substitute a known good CTL32 board
(see subsection 13.3.3).

B : Black O : Orange
Br : Brown P : Purple
Bu : Blue R : Red
G : Green W : White
Gr : Gray Y : Yellow

9-15
9.1 Troubleshooting

continued

From page 9-13


qDefect in cooling system

No
Clean the cooling fan filters.
Is this error message displayed again?

Yes END

Proceed with “Output check cooling fan 1,


Yes
fan 3” selected in the maintenance mode.
Does the dryer fan operate?
(see subsection 9.3.2)

No Proceed to page 9-18


wDiagnosis of the solution heating system

Remove the circulation pump section


Yes
cover (see subsection 9.3.3).
Is the connector disconnected from the
cooling fan?

No
Connect the connector securely.

Turn the power switch to STANDBY, the


built-in circuit breaker and the power
distribution switch OFF.
Disconnect the cooling fan connector.
Remove the electrical section cover and
discharge capacitors C1 and C2
(see subsection 13.3.2).
Disconnect the CN34 connector from the
PWA32/PWB32 board and check the
continuity between the CN34 connector
and the cooling fan connector.

CN34 connector Cooling fan for:


NG
1 and 4 NS-1/NS-2/N4 (fan 3)
heater
Not used (2 and 5) –
3 and 6 N1 heater (fan 1)
Repair or replace the harness.
CN34
3 6

1 4

5333

OK

: Action : Check

9-16
Try replacing the cooling fan
Yes
(see subsection 9.3.4 or 9.3.5).
Try again the output check conducted two
steps before. Is the cooling fan operated?

No END

Discharge capacitors C1 and C2


(see subsection 13.3.2). Yes
Substitute a known good PWA32/PWB32
board (see subsection 13.3.4).
Has the trouble now been remedied?
END
No

Discharge capacitors C1 and C2


(see subsection 13.3.2).
Substitute a known good CTL32 board
(see subsection 13.3.3).

9-17
9.1 Troubleshooting

continued

From page 9-16


wDiagnosis of the solution heating system

Remove the electrical equipment cover


and discharge capacitors C1 and C2
(see subsection 13.3.2).
Disconnect the CN33 connector from the
PWA32/PWB32 board and check the
continuity between the CN33 connector
and the safety thermo-switch connector.

CN33 connector Thermo-switch for:


5 and 6 N1 heater
NG
7 and 8 N2/N3 heater
9 and 10 NS-1/NS-2/N4 heater

CN33 Repair or replace the harness.


10 1

5332

OK

Wait until the aluminum heater surface


temperature drops below 40 ˚C (104˚F).*
Remove the connector cover of the safety
thermo-switch and disconnect the switch
terminals.
Check the continuity between the
terminals.

NOTE: All of the thermo-switches for N1,


N2/N3, and NS-1/NS-2/N4 must
be checked. No

END

5331

If there is no continuity, replace the safety


thermo-switch (see subsection 9.3.7).
Turn the power switch ON .
Is the E608 displayed again?

Yes

B : Black O : Orange
Br : Brown P : Purple
Bu : Blue R : Red
: Action : Check G : Green W : White
Gr : Gray Y : Yellow

* Safety thermo-switch open temperature : 64° ± 3 °C (148° ± 5.4°F); close temperature : 42° ± 3 °C (108° ± 5.4°F)

9-18
Remove the electrical section cover and
discharge capacitors C1 and C2
(see subsection 13.3.2).
Disconnect the CN21 connector from the
PWA32/PWB32 board and check the
continuity between the CN21 connector
and the heater connector.

CN21 connector Heater


1 and 5 N1
NG
2 and 6 N2/N3
3 and 7 NS-1/NS-2/N4

CN21
4 8
Repair or replace the harness.

1 5

5327

OK

Substitute a known good PWA32/PWB32 Yes


board (see subsection 13.3.4).
Has the trouble now been remedied?

No END

Discharge capacitors C1 and C2


(see subsection 13.3.2).
Substitute a known good CTL32 board
(see subsection 13.3.3).

9-19
9.1 Troubleshooting

9.1.6 E700, E701, E702, E704, E705, E706 “N# Temperature Abnormal”

Trouble: After the temperature of the solution (N2 to N4) has reached its setting, it has either risen or dropped more than 7 ˚C (12.6 ˚F)
above or below the setting during operation. The N1 temperature exceeds the setting 1 ˚C ( 1.8 ˚F) during operation.

Press the [YES] key to clear the alarm.

If there is any film currently being processed,


wait until it comes out and the drive motor stops.

Open the processing section cover.


Set the power switch to STANDBY and then
back to ON again.

Have the “processing temperature setting”


(see subsection 5.3.1) and “processing No
temperature calibration”
(see subsection 6.2.1) been carried out
properly?

Yes
Set properly.

Measure the actual temperature of the


solution using a thermometer. Has the No
temperature risen or dropped more than
7 ˚C (12.6 ˚F) (N2 to N4) or 1 ˚C
(1.8 ˚F) (N1) above or below the setting?

Proceed to page 9-25


Yes
wDiagnosis of the temperature detector system

Lower
Is the temperature of the solution higher
or lower than the setting?

Higher Proceed to page 9-23


qDiagnosis of the heater system

: Action : Check

9-20
No
Clean the cooling fan filter.
Does the error recur?

Yes END

Proceed with “output check cooling fan 1”


Yes
for N1, and with “output check cooling fan
3” for NS-1 to N4. Does the cooling fan
operate?

No Proceed to page 9-23


qDiagnosis of the heater system

Remove the circulating pump section


Yes
cover (see subsection 9.3.3).
Is the connector disconnected from the
cooling fan?

No
Connect the connector securely.

Turn the power switch to STANDBY, the


built-in circuit breaker and the power
distribution switch OFF.
Disconnect the connector from the cooling
fan.
Remove the electrical section cover and
discharge capacitors C1 and C2
(see subsection 13.3.2).
Disconnect the CN34 connector from the
PWA32/PWB32 board and check the
continuity between the CN34 connector
and the cooling fan connector.
NG
CN34 connector Cooling fan for:
1 and 4 NS-1/NS-2/N4 heater
Not used (2 and 5) –
3 and 6 N1 heater
Repair or replace the harness.
CN34
3 6

1 4

5333

OK

To Next Page

9-21
9.1 Troubleshooting

continued

From Previous Page

Replace the fan (see subsection 9.3.4 or


Yes
9.3.5). Try conducting the output check
on the cooling fan again. Does the
cooling fan operate?

No END

Discharge capacitors C1 and C2


(see subsection 13.3.2). Yes
Substitute a known good PWA32/PWB32
board (see subsection 13.3.4).
Has the trouble now been remedied?
END
No

Discharge capacitors C1 and C2


(see subsection 13.3.2).
Substitute a known good CTL32 board
(see subsection 13.3.3).

: Action : Check

9-22
From page 9-20, 9-21
qDiagnosis of the heater system

Remove the electrical section cover and


discharge capacitors C1 and C2
(see subsection 13.3.2).
Disconnect the CN33 connector from the
PWA32/PWB32 board and check the
continuity between the CN33 connector
and the safety thermo-switch connector.

CN33 connector Thermo-switch for:


5 and 6 N1 heater
NG
7 and 8 N2/N3 heater
9 and 10 NS-1/NS-2/N4 heater

CN33 Repair or replace the harness.


10 1
R R
R R

5332

OK

Wait until the aluminum heater surface


temperature drops below 40 ˚C (104˚F).*
Remove the connector cover of the safety
thermo-switch and disconnect the switch
terminals.
Check the continuity between the
terminals.

NOTE: All of the thermo-switches for N1,


N2/N3, and NS-1/NS-2/N4 must
be checked. No

END

5331

If there is no continuity, replace the safety


thermo-switch (see subsection 9.3.7).
Turn the power switch ON .
Is the E608 displayed again?

Yes

To Next Page

B : Black O : Orange
Br : Brown P : Purple
Bu : Blue R : Red
G : Green W : White
Gr : Gray Y : Yellow
* Safety thermo-switch open temperature : 64° ± 3 °C (148° ± 5.4°F); close temperature : 42° ± 3 °C (108° ± 5.4°F)

9-23
9.1 Troubleshooting

continued

From Previous Page

Remove the electrical equipment cover


and discharge capacitors C1 and C2
(see subsection 13.3.2).
Disconnect the CN21 connector from the
PWA32/PWB32 board and check the
continuity between the CN21 connector
and the heater connector.

CN21 connector Heater


1 and 5 N1 NG
2 and 6 N2/N3
3 and 7 NS-1/NS-2/N4

CN21
4 8
Repair or replace the harness.

1 5

5327

OK

Substitute a known good PWA32/PWB32 Yes


board (see subsection 13.3.4).
Has the trouble now been remedied?

No END

Discharge capacitors C1 and C2


(see subsection 13.3.2).
Substitute a known good CTL32 board
(see subsection 13.3.3).

B : Black O : Orange
Br : Brown P : Purple
Bu : Blue R : Red
: Action : Check G : Green W : White
Gr : Gray Y : Yellow

9-24
From page 9-20
wDiagnosis of the temperature detector system

Turn the power switch to STANDBY, the


built-in circuit breaker and the power
distribution switch OFF.
Remove the detector protection cover
(see subsection 9.2.2).
Disconnect the connector from the
temperature detector and check the
continuity in the detector. NG

Replace the temperature detector


(see subsection 9.2.4).

5323

OK

Remove the electrical section cover and


discharge capacitors C1 and C2
(see subsection 13.3.2).
Disconnect the CN3 connector from the
CTL32 board and check the continuity
between the CN3 connector and the
temperature detector connector.

CN3 Connector Detector


1 and 2 N1
3 and 4 N2
5 and 6 N3
Not used (7 and 8) –
NG
9 and 10 NS-1
11 and 12 NS-2
13 and 14 N4
15 and 16 DRY
CN3 Repair or replace the harness.
(N1) 2 1 (N1)

16 15

5324

OK

Substitute a known good CTL32 board


(see subsection 13.3.3).

9-25
9.1 Troubleshooting

9.1.7 E905 “Control Data Abnormal. Reset Data”

Trouble: The setting data is beyond or below specifications.

Press the [YES] key to clear the alarm.

After recording the data of the temperature


correction and output, proceed with the data
resetting (see subsection 6.13.1).

Input the data recorded in the previous


step.

NOTE: The recorded data must be


inputed as corrected value
Yes
(temperature correction factor +
displayed temperature).
Input the corrected values on the
M711 and M712 screens (see
subsection 6.2.1). END

Has the trouble now been remedied?

No

Remove the electrical equipment cover and


discharge capacitors C1 and C2
(see subsection 13.3.2).
Substitute a known good CTL32 board
(see subsection 13.3.3).

: Action : Check

9-26
9.2 Subtank Section

9.2.1 Input Check of Processing Solution Level Detector (N1P to N4P)

1. Display the Input Check screen for “Working Tank 4. Try moving the float of the processing solution level
Level Defector Check” (see subsection 6.4.1). detector up and down.
If the signal system of the processing solution level
detector is operating properly, the display will change
from 0 (OFF; Low) to 1 (ON; High).

Processing Solution Level Detector


M73C

2. Open the replenisher supply port cover, remove the


three screws and then remove the protection cover
(see subsection 9.2.2).

Detector Protection Cover

Float
F575

Screws (3)
F405

3. Remove the two screws and the processing solution


level detector.

Screws (2)

Processing Solution Level Detector


F574

9-27
9.2 Subtank Section

9.2.2 Detector Protection Cover 9.2.3 Processing Solution Level


Removal/Installation Detector Replacement
Removal Removal
1. Turn the power switch to STANDBY, and the built-in 1. Turn the power switch to STANDBY, and the built-in
circuit breaker and the main power supply OFF. circuit breaker and the main power supply OFF.

2. Open the replenisher supply port cover. 2. Remove the detector protection cover
(see subsection 9.2.2).
3. Remove the two screws, and remove the detector
protection cover. 3. Disconnect the connector of the processing solution
level detector.
Detector Protection Cover
4. Remove the two screws, and remove the processing
solution level detector.

Connector

Screws (3)
F405

Installation
Level Detector Screws (2) F406
Install the parts in the reverse order of removal, noting the
following.
Installation
NOTE: Ensure that the harness is not pinched by the cover.
Install the parts in the reverse order of removal, noting the
following.

NOTE: Tighten the level detector together with the


temperature detector.

9-28
9.2.4 Solution Temperature Detector
Replacement
Removal
1. Turn the power switch to STANDBY, and the built-in
circuit breaker and the main power supply OFF.

2. Remove the detector protection cover


(see subsection 9.2.2).

3. Disconnect the connector of the solution temperature


detector.

4. Remove the screw, and draw out the solution


temperature detector.

Connector

Solution Temperature
Detector Screw
F407

Installation

Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.

9-29
9.3 Cooling
9.3 Cooling Fan and
Fan and Circulation Circulation Pump Section
Pump Section

9.3.1 Output Check of Circulation 9.3.2 Output Check of Processing


Pump Solution Cooling Fan
1. Display the Circulation Pump output check screen 1. Display the Cooling Fan 1 and Cooling Fan 3 output
(see subsection 6.5.1). check screen (see subsection 6.5.1).

2. If the circulating pump output system is operating 2. If the cooling fan 1 or 3 output system is operating
properly, the sound of the pump operating will be properly, the sound of the cooling fan operating will be
heard when the [1] key is pressed and it will stop when heard when the [1] or [3] key is pressed and the fan
the [0] key is pressed. will be switched off when the [0] key is pressed.

NOTE: Check each pump system operates properly,


seeing the surface of the solution in each tank.

9-30
9.3.3 Circulation Pump Section Cover 9.3.4 N1 Cooling Fan (F1)
Removal/Installation Replacement
Removal Removal
1. Open the processor cover. 1. Turn the power switch to STANDBY, and the built-in
circuit breaker and the main power supply OFF.
2. Remove the three screws, raise the cover slightly and
remove it. 2. Remove the circulation pump section cover
(see subsection 9.3.3).
Screws (3)
3. Disconnect the connector (N1F) from the cooling fan.

4. Remove the four screws and four washers, and


remove the fan shield cooling fan from the bracket.

Screws/Washwrs (4) Fan

Shield Connector F392

Circulation Pump Section Cover


F335 Installation

Installation Install the parts in the reverse order of removal, noting the
following.
Install the parts in the reverse order of removal, noting the
following. NOTE: · Install the cooling fan with “ AIR FLOW” mark
toward the inside.
NOTE: There are two engagement hooks inside the · Pass the right screw through the cord tie as shown.
circulation pump cover. Make sure that the hooks are
hooked in place.

“ AIR FLOW” Mark F394

· Make sure the connector is connected to the fan


securely.

9-31
9.3 Cooling Fan and Circulation Pump Section

9.3.5 NS-1/NS-2/N4 Cooling Fan (F3) 9.3.6 N1 Radiator Replacement


Replacement
Removal
Removal
1. Turn the power switch to STANDBY, and the built-in
1. Turn the power switch to STANDBY, and the built-in circuit breaker and the main power supply OFF.
circuit breaker and the main power supply OFF.
2. Remove the circulation pump section cover (see
2. Remove the circulation pump section cover subsection 9.3.3).
(see subsection 9.3.3).
3. Remove the N1 cooling fan (see subsection 9.3.4).
3. Disconnect the connector (NSGF) from the cooling fan.
4. Drain the N1 processing solution.
4. Remove the four screws and four washers, and
remove the fan shield cooling fan from the bracket. 5. Loosen the four hose clamps and remove the radiator.

Screws/Washers (4) Fan Radiator

Shield Connector Hose Clamps (4)


F390 F393

Installation Installation

Install the parts in the reverse order of removal, noting the Install the radiator in the reverse order of removal.
following.

NOTE: · Install the cooling fan with “ AIR FLOW” mark


toward the inside.

In Side
“ AIR FLOW” Mark F391

· Make sure the connector is connected to the fan


securely.

9-32
9.3.7 Safety Thermo-Switch 9.3.8 Processing Solution Heater (H1,
(TH1 to TH3) Replacement H2, H3) Replacement
Removal Removal
1. Turn the power switch to STANDBY, and the built-in 1. Turn the power switch to STANDBY, and the built-in
circuit breaker and the main power supply OFF. circuit breaker and the main power supply OFF.

2. Remove the circulation pump section cover 2. Remove the circulation pump section cover (see
(see subsection 9.3.3). subsection 9.3.3).

3. For TH3: Remove the cooling fan (see subsection 3. Drain all processing solutions from the processing
9.3.5). tanks.

4. For TH3: Remove the two screws securing the 4. For H3: Remove the cooling fan (see subsection
processing solution heater to release the heater, to 9.3.5).
enable access to the thermo-switch screws.
5. Remove the harness duct protection cover by
5. Remove the connector cover and disconnect the wires removing the three screws.
from the safety thermo-switch.
Screws (3)
6. Remove the two screws, and remove the safety
thermo-switch from the processing solution heater.

Safety Thermo-Switch (TH1 or 2) Screws (2) Screws (2)

Harness Duct Protection Cover


F604

6. Remove the harness duct cover and disconnect the


Cover Wires heater connector.
F395

Safety Thermo-Switch (TH3) Screws (2)

Heater Connector F397


Cover Wires Screws (2)
F396

7. Remove the safety thermo-switch by removing the two


Installation screws.

Install the parts in the reverse order of removal. 8. Disconnect the grounding wire from the heater by
removing the screw.

9-33
9.3 Cooling Fan and Circulation Pump Section

continued 9.3.9 Circulation Pump (P1)


Replacement
9. Remove the heater from the bracket by removing the
two screws. Removal
10. Loosen the hose clamps, disconnect the inlet and 1. Turn the power switch to STANDBY, and the built-in
outlet hoses from the heater, then remove the heater. circuit breaker and the main power supply OFF.

Screws (2) Safety Screws (2) 2. Drain all processing solutions from the processing
Thermo-Switch tanks.

3. Remove:

· Circulation pump section cover (see subsection


9.3.3).
· N1 cooling fan (see subsection 9.3.4).

4. Disconnect circulation pump connector.

Grounding Wire Processing Solution


Heater
F398

Installation
Circulation Pump Connector F400

Install the heater in the reverse order of removal.


5. Remove the protection cover by removing the two
screws.

6. Disconnect the grounding wire from the pump base by


removing the screw.

Screws (2) Protector Cover

Grounding Wire Screw F606

9-34
7. Remove the lower protection cover by removing the 12. Remove the two screws and the pump with the
two screws. bracket.

Screws

F607 Screws (2) F402

8. Remove the seven screws securing the drain valves to 13. Discharge the solution remaining inside the circulation
the pump. pump.

9. Remove the two screws securing the circulation pump.

Screws (7)

Screws (2) F401

10. Disconnect the grounding wire by removing the screw.

11. Loosen the hose clamps, and disconnect the inlet and
outlet hoses from the pump.

NOTE: Quickly wipe off the solution inside the pump


to prevent it from dripping.

9-35
9.3 Cooling Fan and Circulation Pump Section

continued

Installation · Check that the hose clamps are not twisted


when they are installed. Hold each end of the
Install the parts in the reverse order of removal, noting the clamp with a pair of pliers, and tighten it
following. securely.

1. There are two types of orifice on the outlet side of the


N1 circulation pumps. They must be selected
depending on the electrical frequency to be used, as
indicated below.

· 50Hz: φ 5 orifice must be used.


· 60Hz: φ 4.5 orifice must be used.

N1 Orifices

Docking Portion Hose Clamp


0680

3. After installing the new circulation pump, proceed to


check its output (see subsection 9.3.1).

4. After operating the pump for 30 minutes, check that no


solution is leaking at the hose connections.

F403

2. Bear in mind the following points with the hose


connections.

NOTE: · Connect the hoses securely so that they


extend as far as the base of the connection
openings.
· Inspect the hose clamps, and replace them if
the docking portion is damaged.

Hose Clamp Docking Portions

0681

9-36
9.4 Waste Solution Tank Section

9.4.1 Input Check of Waste Solution 9.4.2 Waste Solution Level Detector
Level Detectors Replacement
1. Display the Input Check <Level Detector> screen Removal
(see subsection 6.4.1).
1. Turn the power switch to STANDBY, and the built-in
circuit breaker and the main power supply OFF.

2. Remove the waste solution tank section cover (see


subsection 9.4.1)
M73A
3. Remove the harness cover and disconnect the
2. Remove the waste solution tank section cover. connector of the waste solution level detector.

Waste Solution Tank Section Cover F386 Connector (W1: Red, W2: Yellow) F387

3. Try moving the float of the waste solution tank level 4. Remove the tank cap.
detector up and down.
If the signal system of the respective detector is 5. Cut the detector wire at the connector, rotate the
operating properly, the W1 or W2 display will change detector, and remove it from the cap.
from 0 (OFF; Low) to 1 (ON; High).
Cap
Tank Level Detector

Detector F388
Float F573

4. Replace the waste solution tank cap.

9-37
9.4 Waste Solution Tank Section

continued

Installation

Install the parts in the reverse order of removal, noting the


following procedures when installing a new detector in the
cap joint.

1. Pass the wire harness of a new detector through the


tank cap.

2. Insert the detector wire pins into the connector.

Cap

Connector Detector F389

3. Attach the detector securely to the tank cap.

9-38
10. PROCESSING SOLUTION REPLENISHMENT SYSTEM

Parts Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2

10.1 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3


10.1.1 E002, E003, E004, E005, E006 “N# Replenisher Tank Empty” . . . . . . . . . 10-3
10.1.2 E902 “Water Replenishment Not Working” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6

10.2 Replenisher Tanks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7


10.2.1 Input Check of Replenisher Level Detectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
10.2.2 Replenisher Tank Section Cover Removal/Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
10.2.3 Replenisher Tank Removal/Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
10.2.4 Replenisher Level Detector Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
10.2.5 Replenisher Filter Case Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11
10.2.6 Replenisher Pump Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11
10.2.7 Replenisher Pump Valve Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13

10-1
Parts Location
10.1 Troubleshooting

Replenisher
Nozzles

Solution
Temperature
Detector

Processing Solution
Level Detector

Circulation Filter

N4-R
Replenisher NS-R
Tanks N3-R
N2-R

N1-R

Replenisher
Level Detector

Drain Valves

Replenisher Filter Case

N1W NS-R N2-R


N2W N4-R N3-R N1-R
Replenisher Pumps

F368

10-2
10.1 Troubleshooting

10.1.1 E002, E003, E004, E005, E006 “N# Replenisher Tank Empty”

Trouble: The level detector of the replenisher tank, which is checked once every 5 minutes, is now OFF.

NOTE: After the error message is displayed twice continuously, the error message can not be cleared unless the replenisher is added in
the tank.

Press the [YES] key twice to clear the


alarm and error message.

Yes
Is the solution in the replenisher tank
indicated by the message at a low level?

Check the replenisher line for leaks and


No No
repair or replace if necessary.
Add replenisher (see instruction manual).
Does the error recur after 5 minutes?
Yes
END

Press the [YES] key to clear the alarm.


If there is any film currently being processed,
wait until it comes out and the drive motor
stops.

Drain off the solution and remove the Yes


replenisher tank (see subsection 10.2.3).
Is the replenisher level detector float
trapped or caught by something?

No
Free or disengage the replenisher level
detector float.

To Next Page

: Action : Check

10-3
10.1 Troubleshooting

continued

From Previous Page

Reinstall the removed parts and make


sure that they are in safe.
Turn the main power and the power Yes
switch ON.
Is the detector in question made to go
OFF/ON with “Level Detectors” selected
for the maintenance mode input check
(see subsection 10.2.1)? END

No

Tum the power switch to STANDBY,


built-in circuit breaker and power
distribution switch OFF.
Disconnect the connector of the
replenisher level detector and check the
continuity while moving the float up and
down.
Is the detector repeatedly set OFF and
ON? No
Replenisher Level Detector

Replace the replenisher level detector


(see subsection 10.2.4).

0308

Yes

: Action : Check

10-4
Remove the electrical equipment
cover,and discharge capacitors C1and C2
(see subsection 13.3.2).
Disconnect the CN4 connector from the
CTL32 board and inspect the continuity
between the CN4 connector and the
replenisher level detector connector.

Replenisher level
CN4 Terminal
detector
1 and 2 (Red) N1 NG
3 and 4 (Brown) N2
5 and 6 (Yellow) N3
7 and 8 (Black) NS
9 and 10 (Orange) N4
Repair or replace the harness.

CN4

5301

OK

Substitute a known good CTL32 board


(see subsection 13.3.3).

10-5
10.1 Troubleshooting

10.1.2 E902 “Water Replenishment Not Working”

Trouble: This error message appears only once when the power switch is set ON if DIP switch “2” on the CTL32 board is in the ON
position.

Press the [YES] key to clear the alarm.

Check the water replenishment condition


(see section 6.11).
Tum the power switch to STANDBY, built-in
circuit breaker and power distribution switch
OFF.
Remove the electrical equipment cover and
discharge capacitors C1 and C2
(see subsection 13.3.2).

Set the DIP switch “2” on the CTL32 board to


the OFF position.
NOTE: The DIP switch “2” is factory-set to ON
so that the water will not be replenished
when the power switch is turned on for
the first time after the machine has been
installed.

END

: Action : Check

10-6
10.2 Replenisher Tanks

10.2.1 Input Check of Replenisher 10.2.2 Replenisher Tank Section


Level Detectors Cover Removal/Installation
1. Display the Input Check <Level Detector> screen Removal
(see subsection 6.4.1).
1. Open the replenisher supply port cover, and remove
the three screws securing the replenisher tank section
cover.

Screws (3)
M73A

2. If the signal system of the detector is operating


properly, the display of the replenisher tank in question
will go from 0 (OFF; High) to 1 (ON; Low).

F572
Replenisher Tank Section Cover
F367

2. Lift the replenisher tank section cover slightly and


remove it.

Installation

Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.

10-7
10.2 Replenisher Tanks

10.2.3 Replenisher Tank Removal/Installation

Removal 6. Remove the harness duct cover under the replenisher


tank, and disconnect the replenisher level detector
1. Turn the power switch to STANDBY, and the built-in connector.
circuit breaker and the main power supply OFF.
Harness Duct
2. Remove:

· replenisher tank section cover


(see subsection 10.2.2).
· waste solution tank section cover
(see subsection 9.4.1).

3. Connect the hose to the replenisher drain valve, and


drain the replenisher into a clean container.

Connector F370

7. Remove the replenisher stirring rod.

Drain Valve
F369

4. After all the replenisher has been drained off, close the
drain valve.

5. Remove the waste solution tank section cover bracket


by removing four screws.
Stirring Rod F374

Screws (4)
8. Remove the replenisher tank by lifting it slightly and
drawing it toward you to disengage its locating pin from
the bracket.

Bracket F373

Replenisher Tank F375

10-8
9. Clamp the outlet hose of the replenisher tank securely Installation
using a pinch cock to prevent replenisher leakage.
Install the parts in the reverse order of removal, noting the
NOTE: Drain the replenisher from the hose when the following:
hose is disconnected in the following step 10 if
a pinch cock is not available. NOTE: · Connect the hoses securely so that they extend as
far as the base of the connection openings.
10. Loosen the hose clamp and remove the drain value. · Inspect the hose clamps and replace them if the
docking portion is damaged.
11. Disconnect the outlet hose and drain hose from the
replenisher tank by cutting the cord ties. Hose Clamp Docking Portions

Cord Ties Pinch Cock

0681

Hose Clamps Outlet Hose F376 · Check that the hose clamps are not twisted when
they are installed, hold each end of the clamp with a
pair of pliers, and tighten it.

Docking Portion Hose Clamp 0680

· After the new replenisher tank has been installed,


check that replenisher is not leaking from the hose
connections.

10-9
10.2 Replenisher Tanks

10.2.4 Replenisher Level Detector Replacement

Removal Installation

1. Turn the power switch STANDBY, and the built-in Install the parts in the reverse order of removal, noting the
circuit breaker and the main power supply OFF. following:

2. Remove the following. 1. Note the installation direction of the float if it is


removed from the detector.
· replenisher tank section cover (see subsection
10.2.2). 2. Make sure that the packing is installed on the detector.
· waste solution tank section cover
(see subsection 9.4.1). Packing Float C-ring
· replenisher tank (see subsection 10.2.3).

NOTE: It is not necessary to disconnect the hose.

3. Clamp the replenisher tank outlet hose using a pinch


cock to prevent replenisher leakage.
Nut Side
4. Hold the detector across its flats from the inside of the
replenisher tank using a pair of pliers, and loosen the
detector lock nut.

5. Cut the detector wire at the connector and remove the


detector from the replenisher tank.
Detector 5166

Detector
3. Pass the wire of a new detector through the
replenisher tank.

4. Insert the pins of the detector wires into a new


connector.

Connector

Lock Nut F377

5167

5. Tighten the detector lock nut to the specified torque.

Torque : 10 kgf-cm

10-10
10.2.5 Replenisher Filter Case 10.2.6 Replenisher Pump
Replacement Replacement
Removal Removal
1. Remove the waste solution tank section cover (see 1. Turn the power switch to STANDBY, and the built-in
subsection 9.4.1). circuit breaker and the main power supply OFF.

2. Draw the replenisher filter case out of the bracket. 2. Remove:

3. Clamp the outlet and inlet hoses of the filter case using · waste solution tank section cover (see subsection
pinch cocks. 9.4.1).
· W2 waste solution tank.
4. Disconnect the hoses from the filter case. · circulation pump section cover (see subsection
9.3.3).
Filter Case
3. Remove the replenisher pump section cover by
removing the two screws.

Screws (2)

Hose Pinch Cocks F378

Installation
Replenisher Pump Section Cover F379
Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.

4. Remove the replenisher pump cover by removing the


two screws.

Replenisher Pump Cover

Screws (2) F380

5. Remove the harness duct cover .

10-11
10.2 Replenisher Tanks

continued

6. Disconnect the connector of the pump wire harness. 9. Clamp the inlet and outlet hoses of the pump using
pinch cocks to prevent replenisher leakage, and
disconnect the hoses from the pump.

NOTE: If pinch cock are not available, first drain off


the replenisher from the replenisher tank, and
then disconnect the hoses. Pour replenisher
remaining in the hoses into a container.

Pinch Cocks

F381

F384

Installation

Install the parts in the reverse order of removal, noting the


following:

· Note the identification color of the pumps since the two


different valves are used as shown in the table below.
F382

Color Pump
7. Remove the screw to disconnect the grounding wire
for the pump. N1-R, NS-R, N1W,
White
N2W
8. Remove the pump by removing the screw. Yellow N2-R, N3-R, N4-R

Pump NOTE: · Make sure that the hoses are connected


securely so that they extend as far as the
base of the connection openings of the
replenisher pump.
· After the new pump has been installed,
check that there is no leakage from the
hose connections.
· Make sure the hoses are not bent.
· After the new pump has been installed, set
the discharge volume of the replenisher
pump (see subsection 5.5.1).

Screw Grounding Wire/Screw


F383

10-12
10.2.7 Replenisher Pump Valve Replacement

Removal Installation

1. Turn the power switch to STANDBY, and the built-in Install the parts in the reverse order of removal, noting the
circuit breaker and the main power supply OFF. following:

2. Remove the replenisher pump section cover. · Note the identification color of the pumps since the two
different valves are used as shown in the table below.
Screws (2)
Color Pump
N1-R, NS-R, N1W,
White
N2W
Yellow N2-R, N3-R, N4-R

· Install the valves, noting their direction, as shown in the


figure, and tighten the valve caps.

Replenisher Pump Section Cover F658

3. Clamp the inlet and outlet hoses of the pump using


pinch cocks to prevent replenisher leakage.

NOTE: If pinch cocks are not available, drain the


replenisher from the replenisher tank.

Pinch Cocks

F384

4. Loosen the valve caps, and remove the valves from


the pump.

Valve Caps (2)

Valves 5737

10-13
11. DRYER

Parts Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2

11.1 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3


11.1.1 E507 “DRYER Temperature Sensor Abnormal” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
11.1.2 E607 “DRYER Heater Abnormal” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5
11.1.3 E707 “DRYER Temperature Abnormal” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11
11.1.4 E708 “DRYER Temperature Increasing” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-17

11.2 Dryer Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-23


11.2.1 Roller/Belt Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-23

11.3 Dryer Heater and Dryer Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-25


11.3.1 Output Check of Dryer Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-25
11.3.2 Dryer Heater Section Cover Removal/Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-25
11.3.3 Dryer Temperature Detector (TS8) Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-26
11.3.4 Dryer Safety Thermo-switch (TH4) Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-26
11.3.5 Dryer Heater (H4) Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-27
11.3.6 Dryer Fan (F10) Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-27

11-1
Parts Location
11.1 Troubleshooting

Dryer Rack
Dryer Temperature
Detector

Dryer Safety
Thermo-switch (TH4)

Dryer Duct

Dryer Heater

Dryer Fan

F565

11-2
11.1 Troubleshooting

11.1.1 E507 “DRYER Temperature Sensor Abnormal”

Trouble: The readout temperature for the dryer exceeds the specified limit.

Press the [YES] key to clear the alarm.


If there is any film currently being processed,
wait until it comes out and the drive motor stops.

Open the processing section cover.


Set the power switch to STANDBY and then
back to ON again to clear the alarm and error
message.

Have the “processing temperature setting”


(see subsection 5.3.1) and “processing No
temperature calibration”
(see subsection 6.2.1) been carried out
properly?

Yes Set properly.

Turn the power switch to STANDBY,


built-in circuit breaker and power
distribution switch OFF.
Remove the dryer heater section cover
(see subsection 11.3.2).
Disconnect the connector from the dryer
temperature detector and check the
continuity between the connector NG
terminals on the detector side.

Replace the dryer temperature detector


(see subsection 11.3.3).

5323

OK

To Next Page

: Action : Check

11-3
11.1 Troubleshooting

continued

From Previous Page

Remove the electrical equipment cover


and discharge capacitors C1 and C2
(see subsection 13.3.2).
Disconnect the CN3 connector from the
CTL32 board and check the continuity NG
between the CN3 connector and the
temperature detector connector.

CN3 Connector pin Detector


15 and 16 DRY
Repair or replace the harness.

OK

Substitute a known good CTL32 board


(see subsection 13.3.3).

: Action : Check

11-4
11.1.2 E607 “DRYER Heater Abnormal”
Trouble: The temperature rise of the dryer heater is 5 ˚C (9 ˚F) or less 5 minutes after the machine has started operation.

Press the [YES] key to clear the alarm.

If there is any film currently being processed,


wait until it comes out and the drive motor stops.

Open the processing section cover.


Set the power switch to STANDBY and then
back to ON again.

Have the “processing temperature setting”


(see subsection 5.3.1) and “processing No
temperature calibration”
(see subsection 6.2.1) been carried out
properly?

Yes Set properly.

Measure the actual dryer temperature Yes


using a thermometer. Has the
temperature risen 5 ˚C (9 ˚F) or more in
5 minutes?

No Proceed to page 11-9


3 Diagnosis of the DRY temperature detector system

To Next Page

11-5
11.1 Troubleshooting

continued

From Previous Page

Turn the power switch to STANDBY,


built-in circuit breaker and power
distribution switch OFF.
Remove the dryer heater section cover
(see subsection 11.3.2). Disconnect the
heater connector, and check the
continuity of the heater.
CONTINUITY EXISTS

proceed to page 11-7 1

F615

NO CONTINUITY

Remove the safety thermostat cover of


the heater by removing two screws, and
press the safety thermostat switches. Is a
clicking sound heard?

No

Replace the dryer heater


(see subsection 11.3.5).
F616

Yes

Proceed to page 11-8 2

The safety thermostat shuts off the heater at 95 ˚C (203 ˚F). Reset it by pushing in the push switch.

: Action : Check

11-6
From page 11-6 1

Remove the electrical equipment cover


and discharge capacitors C1 and C2
(see subsection 13.3.2).
Disconnect the CN23 connector from the
PWA32/PWB32 board and check the
continuity between the CN23 connector
and the heater connector. NG

CN23

R Br R Br
Repair or replace the harness.

5328

OK

Disconnect the CN22 connector from the


NG
PWA32 board and check the continuity
between the CN22 connector and the
SSR4.

OK
Repair or replace the harness.

To Next Page

B : Black O : Orange
Br : Brown P : Purple
Bu : Blue R : Red
G : Green W : White
Gr : Gray Y : Yellow

11-7
11.1 Troubleshooting

continued

From Previous Page

Replace the SSR4 (see subsection Yes


13.3.12).
Has the trouble now been remedied ?

No END

Substitute a known good PWA32/PWB32 Yes


board (see subsection 13.3.4).
Has the trouble now been remedied?

No END

Turn the power switch to STANDBY, the built-in


circuit breaker and the power distribution switch
OFF.
Discharge capacitors C1 and C2
(see subsection 13.3.2).
Substitute a known good CTL32 board
(see subsection 13.3.3).

From page 11-6


2 Diagnosis of the dryer fan system

Turn the distributor switch, built-in circuit


breaker and power switch ON. Proceed Yes
with “output check dryer fan” selected in
the maintenance mode. Does the dryer
fan operate? (see subsection 11.3.1)

Inspect why there is no air from the fan


No (blocked duct, clogged dryer filter, foreign matter
on blades, faulty installation of heater, etc.), and
remedy the trouble.

Turn the power switch to STANDBY, the


built-in circuit breaker and the power
distribution switch OFF.
Remove the electrical equipment cover NG
and discharge capacitors C1 and C2
(see subsection 13.3.2).
Disconnect the CN25 connector from the
PWA32/PWB32 board and check the
continuity between the CN25 connector
and the dryer fan connector. Repair or replace the harness.

OK

B : Black O : Orange
Br : Brown P : Purple
Bu : Blue R : Red
: Action : Check G : Green W : White
Gr : Gray Y : Yellow

11-8
Substitute a known good PWA32/PWB32 Yes
board (see subsection 13.3.4).
Has the trouble now been remedied?

END
No

Turn the power switch to STANDBY, the


built-in circuit breaker and the power
distribution switch OFF. Yes
Discharge capacitors C1 and C2
(see subsection 13.3.2).
Substitute a known good CTL32 board
(see subsection 13.3.3).
Has the trouble now been remedied? END

No

Replace the dryer fan (see subsection 11.3.6).

From page 11-5


3 Diagnosis of the DRY temperature
detector system

Turn the power switch to STANDBY, the


built-in circuit breaker and the power
Yes
distribution switch OFF. Try replacing the
DRY temperature detector
(see subsection 11.3.3).
Has the trouble now been remedied?
END

No

To Next Page

11-9
11.1 Troubleshooting

continued

From Previous Page

Turn the power switch to STANDBY, the


built-in circuit breaker and the power
distribution switch OFF.
Remove the electrical equipment cover
and discharge capacitors C1 and C2
(see subsection 13.3.2).
Disconnect the CN3 connector from the
CTL32 board and check the continuity
NG
between the CN3 connector and the
temperature detector connector.
CN3
2 1

Repair or replace the harness.


W W
16 15

WW 5330

OK
END

Substitute a known good CTL32 board


(see subsection 13.3.3).

B : Black O : Orange
Br : Brown P : Purple
Bu : Blue R : Red
: Action : Check G : Green W : White
Gr : Gray Y : Yellow

11-10
11.1.3 E707 “DRYER Temperature Abnormal”

Trouble: After the dryer temperature has reached the setting, it has either risen or dropped more than 20 ˚C above or below the setting
during operation. Alternatively, it has dropped below 40 ˚C or risen above 75 ˚C.

Press the [YES] key to clear the alarm.

If there is any film currently being processed,


wait until it comes out and the drive motor stops.

Open the processing section cover.


Set the power switch to STANDBY and then
back to ON again.

Have the “processing temperature setting”


(see subsection 5.3.1) and “processing No
temperature calibration”
(see subsection 6.2.1) been carried out
properly?

Yes Set properly.

Measure the actual dryer temperature


using a thermometer. Has the
temperature risen or dropped more than
20 ˚C above or below the setting? Yes
Alternatively, has it dropped below 35 ˚C
or risen above 75 ˚C?
Proceed to page 11-16
1 Diagnosis of the DRY temperature detector system
No

To Next Page

11-11
11.1 Troubleshooting

continued

From Previous Page

Turn the power switch to STANDBY, the


built-in circuit breaker and the power
distribution switch OFF.
Remove the dryer heater section cover
(see subsection 11.3.2).
Disconnect the heater connector, and
check the continuity of the heater.
CONTINUITY EXISTS

Proceed to page 11-13 2 .

F615

NO CONTINUITY

Remove the safety thermostat cover of


the heater by removing two screws, and
press the safety thermostat switch. Is a
clicking sound heard?

No

Replace the dryer heater


(see subsection 11.3.5).

F616

Yes

Proceed to page 11-14 3

The safety thermostat shuts off the heater at 85˚C (185 ˚F). Reset it by pushing in the push switch.

: Action : Check

11-12
From page 11-12 2

Remove the electrical equipment cover


and discharge capacitors C1 and C2
(see subsection 13.3.2).
Disconnect the CN23 connector from the
PWA32/PWB32 board and check the
continuity between the CN23 connector
and the heater connector.

NG
CN23

R Br R Br

Repair or replace the harness.

5328

OK

NG
Check the continuity between the CN22
and the SSR4.

OK
Repair or replace the harness.

Replace the SSR4 (see subsection Yes


13.3.12).
Has the trouble now been remedied ?

No END

Replace a known good PWA32/PWB32 Yes


board (see subsection 13.3.4).
Has the trouble now been remedied?

No END

To Next Page

B : Black O : Orange
Br : Brown P : Purple
Bu : Blue R : Red
G : Green W : White
Gr : Gray Y : Yellow

11-13
11.1 Troubleshooting

continued

From Previous Page

Turn the power switch to STANDBY, the built-in


circuit breaker and the power distribution switch
OFF.
Discharge capacitors C1 and C2
(see subsection 13.3.2).
Substitute a known good CTL32 board
(see subsection 13.3.3).

From page 11-12, 11-13


3 Diagnosis of the dryer fan system

Set the power distributor switch, the built-


in circuit breaker and the power switch to
Yes
ON. Proceed with “output check dryer
fan” selected in the maintenance mode.
Does the dryer fan operate?
(see subsetion 11.3.1).
Inspect why there is no air from the fan
(blocked duct, clogged dryer filter, foreign matter
No on blades, faulty installation of heater, etc.), and
remedy the trouble.

: Action : Check

11-14
Turn the power switch to STANDBY, the
built-in circuit breaker and the power
distribution switch OFF.
Remove the electrical equipment cover NG
and discharge capacitors C1 and C2
(see subsection 13.3.2).
Disconnect the CN25 connector from the
PWA32/PWB32 board and check the
continuity between the CN25 connector
and the dryer fan connector.
Repair or replace the harness.

OK

Substitute a known good PWA32/PWB32


Yes
board (see subsection 13.3.4).
Has the trouble now been remedied?

No END

Turn the power switch to STANDBY, the


built-in circuit breaker and the power
distribution switch OFF.
Yes
Discharge capacitors C1 and C2
(see subsection 13.3.2).
Substitute a known good CTL32 board
(see subsection 13.3.3).
Has the trouble now been remedied? END

No

Replace the dryer fan (see subsection 11.3.6).

B : Black O : Orange
Br : Brown P : Purple
Bu : Blue R : Red
G : Green W : White
Gr : Gray Y : Yellow

11-15
11.1 Troubleshooting

continued

From page 11-11


1 Diagnosis of the DRY temperature
detector system

Turn the power switch to STANDBY, the


built-in circuit breaker and the power Yes
distribution switch OFF.
Try replacing the DRY temperature
detector (see subsection 11.3.3).
Has the trouble now been remedied?
END

No

Turn the power switch to STANDBY, the


built-in circuit breaker and the power
distribution switch OFF.
Remove the electrical equipment cover
and discharge capacitors C1 and C2
(see subsection 13.3.2).
Disconnect the CN3 connector from the
CTL32 board and check the continuity
NG
between the CN3 connector and the
temperature detector connector.

CN3
2 1

Repair or replace the harness.


W W
16 15

WW 5330

OK
END

Substitute a known good CTL32 board


(see subsection 13.3.3).

: Action : Check

11-16
11.1.4 E708 “DRYER Temperature Increasing”

Trouble: The dryer temperature fails to rise above 45 ˚C (113 ˚F) within 9 minutes after the machine started operating.
(This error message is automatically canceled when the temperature exceeds 45 ˚C/113 ˚F.)

Is the dryer temperature set to 45 ˚C


(113 ˚F) or more, using the “processing No
temperature setting” mode?
(see subsection 5.3.1)

Yes
Set properly.

Yes
Is the air above the dryer warm?

No Proceed to page 11-22


4 Diagnosis of the DRY temperature
detector system

No
Is the room temperature unusually low?
(Under 10 ˚C/50 ˚F)

Yes

Yes
Press the [START] key and display the
temperature. Does the temperature rise?

No

* (NOTE) Yes
Is the dryer fan filter installed properly?

No
To Next Page

Install the dryer fan filter properly.


(The temperature does not rise because fresh
air to the dryer is increased if the dryer fan filter
is not installed properly.)

Wait until the temperature rises.

* NOTE : At this point of time, E607 or E707 will appear. Perform the troubleshooting for each error.

11-17
11.1 Troubleshooting

continued

From Previous Page

If there is any film currently being processed,


wait until it comes out and the drive motor stops.
Take care not to jam the film in the dryer. In this
case, wet film may come out because the dryer
temperature does not rise.

Turn the power switch to STANDBY, the


built-in circuit breaker and the power
distribution switch OFF.
Remove the dryer heater cover
(see sebsection 11.3.2). Disconnect the
heater connector, and check the
continuity of the heater.
OK

Proceed to page 11-20 1

F615

NG

: Action : Check

11-18
Press the safety thermostat switch. Is a
clicking sound heard?

No

Replace the dryer heater


(see subsection 11.3.5).
F616

Yes

Proceed to page 11-21


2 Defect in dryer fan system

The safety thermostat shuts off the heater at 95 ˚C (203˚F). Reset it by pushing in the push switch.

11-19
11.1 Troubleshooting

continued

From page 11-18 1

Remove the electrical equipment cover


and discharge capacitors C1 and C2
(see subsection 13.3.2).
Disconnect CN23 connector from the
PWA32/PWB32 board and check the
continuity between the CN23 connector
and the heater connector.
NG

CN23

R Br R Br
Repair or replace the harness.

Heater Connector 5328

OK

END

NG
Check the continuity between the CN22
and the SSR4.

OK
Repair or replace the harness.

Yes
Replace the SSR4 (see subsection
13.3.12).

No END

Substitute a known good PWA32/PWB32 Yes


board (see subsection 13.3.4).
Has the trouble now been remedied?

No END

Turn the power switch to STANDBY, the built-in


circuit breaker and the power distribution switch
OFF.
Discharge capacitors C1 and C2
(see subsection 13.3.2).
Substitute a known good CTL32 board
(see subsection 13.3.3).

B : Black O : Orange
Br : Brown P : Purple
Bu : Blue R : Red
G : Green W : White
Gr : Gray Y : Yellow

11-20
From page 11-19
2 Defect in dryer fan system

Turn the power distributor switch, the


built-in circuit breaker and the power
switch ON. Yes
Proceed with “output check dryer fan”
selected in the maintenance mode.
Does the dryer fan operate?
(see subsection 11.3.1)
Inspect why there is no air from the fan
(blocked duct, clogged dryer filter, foreign matter
No on blades, faulty installation of heater, etc.), and
remedy the trouble.

Turn the power switch to STANDBY, the


built-in circuit breaker and the power
distribution switch OFF.
Remove the electrical equipment cover
NG
and discharge capacitors C1 and C2
(see subsection 13.3.2).
Disconnect the CN25 connector from the
PWA32/PWB32 board and check the
continuity between the CN25 connector
and the dryer fan connector.
Repair or replace the harness.

OK

Substitute a known good PWA32/PWB32 Yes


board (see subsection 13.3.4).
Has the trouble now been remedied?

No END

Turn the power switch to STANDBY, the


built-in circuit breaker and the power Yes
distribution switch OFF.
Discharge capacitors C1 and C2
(see subsection 13.3.2).
Substitute a known good CTL32 board
(see subsection 13.3.3).
Has the trouble now been remedied? END

No

Replace the dryer fan (see subsection 11.3.6).

B : Black O : Orange
Br : Brown P : Purple
Bu : Blue R : Red
: Action : Check G : Green W : White
Gr : Gray Y : Yellow

11-21
11.1 Troubleshooting

continued

From page 11-17


4 Diagnosis of the DRY temperature
detector system

Turn the power switch to STANDBY, the


built-in circuit breaker and the power Yes
distribution switch OFF.
Try replacing the DRY temperature
detector (see subsection 11.3.3).
Has the trouble now been remedied?
END

No

Turn the power switch to STANDBY, the


built-in circuit breaker and the power
distribution switch OFF.
Remove the electrical equipment cover
and discharge capacitors C1 and C2
(see subsection 13.3.2).
Disconnect the CN3 connector from the
CTL32 board and check the continuity
NG
between the CN3 connector and the
temperature detector connector.

CN3
2 1

Repair or replace the harness.


W W
16 15
WW 5330

No
END

Substitute a known good CTL32 board


(see subsection 13.3.3).

B : Black O : Orange
Br : Brown P : Purple
Bu : Blue R : Red
: Action : Check G : Green W : White
Gr : Gray Y : Yellow

11-22
11.2 Dryer Rack

11.2.1 Roller/Belt Replacement

Removal 5. Remove the side guide on the sprocket side and


bottom guide.
1. Remove the No.5 crossover rack.
Side Guide
2. Loosen the two screws and remove the exit guide.

Screws (2)

Exit Guide
F308

3. Lift up the dryer rack to remove it.

Bottom Guide F602

6. Remove the side plate by removing the nine screws


and four nuts.

Nuts (4)

Dryer Rack F309

4. Remove the inlet and outlet side covers by removing


the eight screws and six nuts.

Inlet Side Cover Outlet Side Cover Side Plate Screws (9)
F312

7. Remove the exit rollers and shaft.

Screws (8) Nuts (6)


F310

11-23
11.2 Dryer Rack

continued

8. Remove the side plate on the sprocket side, bottom Installation


turn guide, inlet side guides and outlet side guides by
removing the nine screws and four nuts. Install the belt and rollers in the reverse order of removal,
noting the following.
Outlet Side Guides Nuts (4) Roller Shaft
NOTE: Note the installation position of the rollers.

Side Plate Screws (9) Exit Rollers


F313

9. Remove the belt and rollers.


F315

Belt
NOTE: Note the shape of the inlet and outlet side covers.
Inlet Side Cover Outlet Side Cover

Rollers F314

F316

11-24
11.3 Dryer Heater and Dryer Fan

11.3.1 Output Check of Dryer Fan 11.3.2 Dryer Heater Section Cover
Removal/Installation
1. Display the Dryer Fan output check screen
(see subsection 6.5.1). Removal
1. Remove the negative film receiver.

2. Remove the two screws and remove the dryer heater


cover by lifting it upward.

2. If the dryer fan output system is operating properly, the Screws (2)
sound of the fan operating will be heard when the [1]
key is pressed and it will stop when the [0] key is
pressed.

Dryer Heater Cover


F325

Installation

Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.

11-25
11.3 Dryer Heater and Dryer Fan

11.3.3 Dryer Temperature Detector 11.3.4 Dryer Safety Thermo-switch


(TS8) Replacement (TH4) Replacement
Removal Removal
1. Turn the power switch to STANDBY, and the built-in 1. Turn the power switch to STANDBY, and the built-in
circuit breaker and the main power supply OFF. circuit breaker and the main power supply OFF.

2. Remove the dryer heater section cover 2. Remove the dryer heater section cover (see
(see subsection 11.3.2). subsection 11.3.2).

3. Disconnect the dryer temperature detector connector. 3. Disconnect the two wires from the safety thermo-
switch.
4. Remove the screw and remove the dryer temperature
detector. 4. Remove the safety therm-switch by removing the two
screws.
Dryer Temperature Grounding Wire
Detector Screws (2) Safety Thermo-switch

Screw Heat Protector


F326
Wires (2)
F329

Installation
Installation
Install the parts in the reverse order of removal, noting the
following. Install the safety thermo-switch in the reverse order of
removal.
IMPORTANT:
The detector element is bared at the tip of the dryer
temperature detector. Be careful not to touch the tip of the
sensor to the surrounding parts while installing or removing
the detector.

Dryer Temperature Detector

Detector Element
5115

11-26
11.3.5 Dryer Heater (H4) Replacement 11.3.6 Dryer Fan (F10) Replacement

Removal Removal

1. Turn the power switch to STANDBY, and the built-in 1. Turn the power switch to STANDBY, and the built-in
circuit breaker and the main power supply OFF. circuit breaker and the main power supply OFF.

2. Remove the dryer heater section cover 2. Remove:


(see subsection 11.3.2).
• dryer heater section cover (see subsection 11.3.2).
3. Disconnect the dryer heater connectors (DRYT, • circulation pump section cover
DRYH). (see subsection 9.3.3).

4. Remove the screw and disconnect the grounding wire. 3. Remove the harness duct protection cover by
removing the three screws.
5. Remove the four screws and remove the dryer heater.

Screws (4) Dryer Heater

Harness Duct Protection Cover Screws (3)


F603
Connectors (2)
F327

4. Remove the harness duct cover and disconnect the


Installation connector (DFAN).

Install the parts in the reverse order of removal, noting the Connector (DFAN)
following.

! CAUTION
The machine used at 200V or 210V must install the optional
dryer heater (Part No.117G03701) instead of the standard
type.

Harness Duct Cover F332

11-27
11.3 Dryer Heater and Dryer Fan

continued

5. Remove the two screws securing the fan duct. 9. Remove the bracket from the fan by removing the four
screws.

Screws (4)

Fan Duct Scuring Screws (2) F330


Bracket Dryer Fan F334

6. Remove the screw securing the capacitor.


Installation
7. Removes the four screws securing the fan bracket.
Install the dryer fan in the reverse order of removal.
Screw Capacitor

Fan Bracket Securing Screws (4)


F331

8. Disconnect the grounding wire from the fan by


removing the screw, lock washer, plain washer and
toothed washer.

Grounding Wire Toothed Washer

Screw Lock Washer Plain Washer F333

11-28
12. DRIVE SYSTEM

Parts Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

12.1 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3


12.1.1 E210 “Wait Until Display Shows [Ready for Proc.]” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3

12.2 Drive Train . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4


12.2.1 Output Check of Drive Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4
12.2.2 Drive Motor Bracket Removal/Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4
12.2.3 Drive Motor (M1) Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5
12.2.4 Drive Gear/Sprocket Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6
12.2.5 Drive Chain Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6

12.3 Film Leader Collector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-7


12.3.1 Exit Electrostatic Eliminator Brush Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-7
12.3.2 Roller Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-7

12-1
Parts Location

Film Leader Collector


Drive Shaft

Feeding Roller

Chain
Tensioner

Idler Sprocket

Drive Motor

Drive Chain

F566

12-2
12.1 Troubleshooting

12.1.1 E210 “Wait Until Display Shows [Ready for Proc.]”

Trouble: This appears when the [START] key is used to restart operation after it has been stopped by the emergency stop switch during
film processing.
Wait until the “Ready for processing”
display appears.
The alarm and error messages are
automatically cleared 45 seconds after
the film has passed through if film is
present in the loader and 45 seconds
after the [START] key is pressed if no
film is present.

12-3
12.2 Drive Train

12.2.1 Output Check of Drive Motor 12.2.2 Drive Motor Bracket Removal/
Installation
1. Display the Drive Motor output check screen
(see subsection 6.5.1). Removal
1. Turn the power switch to STANDBY, and the built-in
circuit breaker and the main power supply OFF.

2. Remove the electrical equipment cover and discharge


M744 capacitors C1 and C2 (see subsection 13.3.2).

2. Ensure that the processing section cover is closed. 3. Remove the two chain tensioner springs.

3. If the drive motor output systems are operating Springs (2)


properly, the motor will operate when the [START] key
is pressed and stop when the [DRIVE STOP] key is
pressed.

NOTE: The drive chain in the processor is driven


when the drive motor operates.

F339

4. Remove the harness duct cover, and disconnect the


connector of the drive motor.

5. Remove the screw, and remove the motor capacitor


from the bracket.

Cord Tie

Connector Harness Duct Cover F340

12-4
12.2.3 Drive Motor (M1) Replacement

6. Remove the four screws, and remove the drive motor Removal
bracket.
1. Remove the drive motor bracket
Drive Motor Bracket (see subsection 12.2.2).

2. Remove nut and the grease pan.

3. Remove the four screws and the motor from the


bracket.

Screws (4) Grease Pan Nut

Screws (4) F341

Installation

Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.

Plain Washers (4) Toothed Washers (4) F343

Installation
Install the motor in the reverse order of removal, noting the
following.

NOTE: The gear head on the motor used with a 50 Hz power


supply differs from that with a 60 Hz power supply.
Check the power line frequency label on the gear
head.

Frequency Mark: 50 Hz: 300K


60 Hz: 360K

Drive Motor

Gear Head F344

12-5
12.2 Drive Train

12.2.4 Drive Gear/Sprocket 12.2.5 Drive Chain Replacement


Replacement
1. Turn the power switch to STANDBY, and the built-in
Removal circuit breaker and the main power supply OFF.

1. Remove the drive motor bracket 2. Remove the circulation pump section cover
(see subsection 12.2.2). (see subsection 9.3.3).

2. Remove the drive gear/sprocket and bearings by 3. Using the manual crank handle, turn the drive shaft
removing the E-ring. until the master link of the drive chain can be seen.

Bearings (2) 4. Remove the chain clip using a pair of pliers, then
remove the master links.

Manual Crank Handle

Drive Gear/Sprocket E-ring F342

Installation Chain Clip Master Links


F336

Install the drive gear/sprocket in the reverse order of removal.


5. Connect a new chain to the end of the old chain to
serve as a guide.

6. Turn the manual crank handle to replace the old chain


with the new chain.

Manual Crank Handle

New Chain Old Chain F337

7. Remove the old chain from the new chain.

8. Connect the ends of the chain using the master links


and clip.

NOTE: Be sure to point the closed end of the chain


clip in the chain’s rotation direction.

9. Install the pump section cover.

12-6
12.3 Film Leader Collector

12.3.1 Exit Electrostatic Eliminator 12.3.2 Roller Replacement


Brush Replacement
Removal
1. Remove the exit electrostatic eliminator brush by
removing the two screws. 1. Remove:

· dryer rack (see subsection 11.2.1).


· exit electrostatic eliminator brush
(see subsection 12.3.1).

2. Remove the cover by removing the two special


screws.

Electrostatic Eliminator Brush Screws (2) F324

2. Install a new exit electrostatic eliminator brush with the


two screws.

Cover Special Screws (2) F317

3. Remove the spacer and cover bracket.

Spacer

Cover Bracket F318

4. Remove the bracket and roller assembly by removing


the five screws.

Screws (5) Roller Assembly

Bracket F319

12-7
12.3 Film Leader Collector

continued

5. Remove the two springs, bracket and hard roller. Installation

Hard Roller Bracket Install the rollers in the reverse order of removal, noting the
following.

NOTE: · Apply thread locking agent to the hex. socket head


screw.

Thread Locking Agent:LOCTITE 425 or equivalent

· Align the hole in the rubber roller shaft with the hex
socket head screw.

Springs (2) F320

6. Remove the two E-rings from the hard roller, then


remove the roller shaft and bearings.

Hard Roller Bearings (2)

Thread Locking Agent Hex. Socket Head Screw F323

E-rings (2) Roller Shaft F321

7. Loosen the hex. socket head set screw and remove


the sprocket, rubber roller, thrust bearing and ball
bearing.

Hex. Socket Head Set Screw Thrust Bearing

Sprocket Ball Bearing Rubber Roller F322

12-8
13. CONTROL PANEL AND ELECTRICAL
EQUIPMENT SECTION

Parts Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2

13.1 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3


13.1.1 E202 “Processing!! Turn ON Power Switch” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3
13.1.2 E203 “Processing!! Turn ON Drive Start Key” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4
13.1.3 E904 “Communication Error” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6

13.2 Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7


13.2.1 Output Check of Film Loading Lamp (Green Lamp) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7
13.2.2 Input Check of Drive Stop Switch (S1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7
13.2.3 Control Panel Removal/Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8
13.2.4 Power Switch Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8
13.2.5 Drive Stop Switch Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9
13.2.6 Film Loading Lamp (Green Lamp) Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9
13.2.7 Display Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10
13.2.8 Display Contrast Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11
13.2.9 Keyboard Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11

13.3 Electrical Equipment Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12


13.3.1 Electrical Equipment Cover Removal/Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12
13.3.2 Discharge Capacitors (C1, C2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12
13.3.3 CTL32 Circuit Board Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13
13.3.4 PWA32/PWB32 Circuit Board Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16
13.3.5 Power Supply (PU) Circuit Board Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17
13.3.6 Leakage Breaker Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17
13.3.7 Relay (K21, K22) Replacement (CE type only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18
13.3.8 Leakage Breaker Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18
13.3.9 Circuit Protector (CP1-CP3) Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19
13.3.10 Noise Filter (NF1) Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19
13.3.11 Circuit Breaker (NFB) Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-20
13.3.12 SSR4 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-20
13.3.13 Counter (CNT) Replacement (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-21
13.3.14 Room Temperature/Humidity Detector (THT) Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 13-21
13.3.15 Part Selection Depending on Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-22

13-1
Parts Location
13.1 Troubleshooting

Drive Motor (M1)

PU Circuit Board
CTL32 Circuit Board

Counter (CNT)

Circuit Protector
(CP1 to CP3)

PWA32 (for UL)/PWB32 (for CE)


Circuit Board

Circuit Breaker (NFB)

Step Down Transformer


Noise Filter (NF1)

Power Supply Terminal


Block (TB1)

Leakage Breaker Terminal Block (TB2) Relays (CE only) SSR4

F349

13-2
13.1 Troubleshooting

13.1.1 E202 “Processing!! Turn ON Power Switch”

Trouble: The power switch was turned STANDBY during operation.

Yes
Was the power switch turned STANDBY
during operation?

No Set the power switch to ON.


Press the [YES] key twice to clear the alarm and
error message.

Make sure there is no film in the


processor.
Turn the power switch to STANDBY, the
built-in circuit breaker and the power
distribution switch OFF.
Discharge capacitors C1 and C2
(see subsection 13.3.2).
Remove the control panel
(see subsection 13.2.3).
Remove the connectors from the power
switch. Set the switch ON/STANDBY and NG
check the continuity.

Power Switch

Replace the power switch


(see subsection 13.2.4).

0333

OK

Disconnect the CN30 connector from NG


the PWA32/PWB32 board and the CN6
connector from the CTL32 board. Check
the continuity between the connectors.

OK
Repair or replace the harness.

Substitute a known good PWA32/PWB32 or


CTL32 board (see subsection 13.3.3 or 13.3.4).

: Action : Check

13-3
13.1 Troubleshooting

13.1.2 E203 “Processing!! Turn ON Drive Start Key”

Trouble: The drive stop switch was pressed during operation (film processing).

Yes
Was the drive stop switch pressed
during operation?

No Operation is resumed when the [START] key is


pressed.
The alarm and error messages are automatically
cleared in a minute. after the [START] key is
pressed if there is no film in the loader section.

Yes
Press the [START] key.
Is the dryer exit roller rotating?

No
If there is any film currently being processed,
wait until it comes out and drive motor stops.

Rotate the manual drive handle until all the films


come out from the processor.

Open the processing section cover.


Set the power switch STANDBY/ON.
Yes
Proceed with “S1” with the “input check,
load sensor” selected in the maintenance
mode (see subsection 13.2.2).
Is S1 set OFF/ON?
END

No

S1: Emergency stop switch

: Action : Check

13-4
Turn the power switch to STANDBY, the
built-in circuit breaker and the power
distribution switch OFF.
Remove the electrical equipment cover OK
and discharge capacitors C1 and C2
(see subsection 13.3.2).
Disconnect the CN6 connector from the
CTL32 board and set the drive stop
switch ON/OFF and check the continuity. Substitute a known good CTL32 board
(see subsection 13.3.3).
NG

Remove the control panel NG


(see subsection 13.2.3).
Check the continuity between the
terminals in the drive stop switch.

OK
Replace the drive stop switch
(see subsection 13.2.5).

Repair or replace the harness.

13-5
13.1 Troubleshooting

13.1.3 E904 “Communication Error”

Trouble: Communication error occurs during communication between the machine and host computer.
Communication does not complete within 2.5 sec.
Communication is performed during operation.

Press the [YES] key to clear the alarm.

Yes
Is communication performed during
operation?

No
Wait until all the films get out and the operation
stops.

Reset the host computer and proceed No


with the communication again.
Does the same error recur?

Yes END

Replace the RC-232C cable between the Yes


machine and computer.
Has the trouble now been remedied?

No END

Yes
Replace the computer.
Has the trouble now been remedied?

No END

Discharge capacitors C1 and C2


(see subsection 13.3.2).
Substitute a known good CTL32 board
(see subsection 13.3.3).

: Action : Check

13-6
13.2 Control Panel

13.2.1 Output Check of Film Loading 13.2.2 Input Check of Drive Stop
Lamp (Green Lamp) Switch (S1)
1. Display the Ready Lamp output check screen 1. Display the Input Check “S1” screen
(see subsection 6.5.1). (see subsection 6.4.1).

M741 M736

2. If the green or red lamp output system is operating 2. Turn the drive stop switch on and off. If switch S1 is
properly, the green or red lamp will come on when the operating properly, it will change 0 (OFF) to 1 (ON)
[1] key is pressed and go off when the [0] key is when pressed.
pressed.

Film Loading Lamp (Green Lamp)

M736

Drive Stop Switch F568

Drive Stop Switch


F494

13-7
13.2 Control Panel

13.2.3 Control Panel Removal/ 13.2.4 Power Switch Replacement


Installation
Removal
Removal
1. Turn the power switch to STANDBY, and the built-in
1. Turn the power switch to STANDBY, and the built-in circuit breaker and the main power supply OFF.
circuit breaker and the main power supply OFF.
2. Remove the electric equipment cover and discharge
2. Remove the electrical equipment cover capacitors C1 and C2 (see subsection 13.3.2).
(see subsection 13.3.1).
3. Remove the control panel (see subsection 13.2.3).
3. Discharge capacitors C1 and C2
(see subsection 13.3.2). 4. Disconnect the wires from the power switch.

4. Open the replenisher tank cover. NOTE: Take care not to damage the power switch
terminals.
5. Remove the control panel by removing the four
screws. 5. Press the power switch tabs, and remove the switch.

Screws (4) Control Panel Brown 2 Control Panel

F408
Power Switch Yellow 2 F411

Installation Installation

Install the control panel in the reverse order of removal. Installation is essentially in the reverse order of removal,
noting the following:

NOTE: Connect the wires to the power switch terminals.

13-8
13.2.5 Drive Stop Switch Replacement 13.2.6 Film Loading Lamp (Green
Lamp) Replacement
Removal
Removal
1. Remove the control panel (see subsection 13.2.3).
1. Remove the control panel (see subsection 13.2.3).
2. Disconnect the terminal box from the drive stop switch
by pressing both tabs of the terminal box. 2. Disconnect the lamp connector and cut the lam wires
at the connector.
Terminal Box
3. Remove the lamp by removing the nut.

Film Loading Lamp

Drive Stop Switch


F412

3. Remove the lock nut and washer to remove the switch.


Nut Connector F409

4. Remove the terminal box from the wire harness using


a soldering iron. Installation
Washer Switch 1. Install a new lamp and tighten it with the nut.

2. Insert the sensor wire pins into the connector.

Pins

Terminal Box Lock Nut


0635

Installation
Connector F410
Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.

3. Connect the lamp connector and install the control


panel.

13-9
13.2 Control Panel

13.2.7 Display Replacement

Removal 5. Remove the display and spacer from the circuit board
by removing the four screws and nuts.
1. Remove the control panel (see subsection 13.2.3).
Display Screws (4)
2. Remove the two harness duct covers and disconnect
the CN5 connector.

Harness Duct Covers

Circuit Board Spacer (4)


F416

Installation
CN5 Connector F415 Install the display in the reverse order of removal. If
necessary, adjust display contrast (see subsection 13.2.8).
3. Remove the display by removing the two screws.

Display

Screws (2)
F413

4. Disconnect the flat cable from the display.

Display

Flat Cable
F414

13-10
13.2.8 Display Contrast Adjustment 13.2.9 Keyboard Replacement

1. Turn the power switch to STANDBY, and the built-in Removal


circuit breaker and the main power supply OFF.
1. Remove the control panel (see subsection 13.2.3).
2. Remove the electrical equipment cover
(see subsection 13.3.1). 2. Remove the two screws securing the display, and the
four screws securing the keyboard.
3. Discharge capacitors C1 and C2 (see subsection
13.3.2). Screws (2) Display

4. Turn ON the main power supply and built-in circuit


breaker, then turn the power switch to STANDBY.

5. Adjust display contrast by turning the variable


resistance (VR1) on the CTL32 circuit board.

VR1

Keyboard Screws (4) Grounding Wire


F417

3. Disconnect the flat cable from the display.

Installation

Install the keyboard in the reverse order of removal.


CTL32 Circuit Board F617

6. Install the electrical equipment cover.

13-11
13.3 Electrical
13.3 Electrical Equipment Section
Equipment Section

13.3.1 Electrical Equipment Cover 13.3.2 Discharge Capacitors (C1, C2)


Removal/Installation
! CAUTION
! CAUTION Always discharge capacitors C1 and C2 for film trailing end
Always discharge capacitors C1 and C2 for film trailing end cutting at power OFF when the electrical equipment cover is
cutting at power OFF when the electrical equipment cover is removed.
removed (see subsection 13.3.2). The capacitor voltage is approximately DC140V before
The capacitor voltage is approximately DC140V before discharging.
discharging.
1. Turn the power switch to STANDBY, and the built-in
Removal circuit breaker and the main power supply OFF.

1. Turn the power switch to STANDBY, and the built-in 2. Remove the electrical equipment cover
circuit breaker and the main power supply OFF. (see subsection 13.3.1).

2. Remove the two screws securing the electrical 3. Push the red button on the PWA32/PWB32 circuit
equipment cover. board for approximately 5 seconds to discharge
capacitors C1 and C2.
3. Lift the cover to remove it.

Screws (2)

Red Button F420

Electrical Equipment Cover


F338

4. Discharge capacitors C1 and C2


(see subsection 13.3.2).

Installation

Install the parts in the reverse order removal.

13-12
13.3.3 CTL32 Circuit Board
Replacement
4. Measure the capacitors voltages as described below to
check if they are fully discharged. If voltage is 7V or Removal
more after measurement according to the procedures
below, repeat step 3. 1. If possible, record the setting data, such as the
replenisher amount, etc.
1) Left cutter capacitor (C2) voltage measurement
2. Turn the power switch to STANDBY, and the built-in
NOTE: Set the digital voltmeter to a range in circuit breaker and the main power supply OFF.
which a voltage exceeding DC100V can
be measured. 3. Remove the electrical equipment cover
(see subsection 13.3.1).
To measure the voltage, connect the (+) terminal
of the voltmeter to the +LC terminal on the PWT ! WARNING
circuit board and connect the (–) terminal to COM The main power supply MUST be switched OFF.
terminal. Even if the power switch is at STANDBY, electricity will
still be supplied in the power supply area, so that it can
C2 Capacitor cause electric shocks and short-circuiting.

4. Discharge capacitors C1 and C2


(see subsection 13.3.2).

5. Disconnect the connectors from the CTL32 circuit


board.

6. Unlock the seven circuit board post and remove the


CTL32 circuit board.

CTL32 Circuit Board

F618

2) Right cutter capacitor (C1) voltage measurement

To measure the voltage, connect the (+) terminal


of the voltmeter to the +RC terminal on the PWT
circuit board and connect the (–) terminal to COM
terminal.

C1 Capacitor

F357

Installation

1. Install the new CTL32 circuit board and connect the


connectors.

2. Make sure that the jumper plug (JP1) is set to “1”(ON).

F619

Jumper Plug (JP1)


F358

13-13
13.3 Electrical Equipment Section

continued

3. Check the DIP switch settings as in the table below. 8. Measure the output voltages using a digital voltmeter,
and check the findings against the values in the table
below.
DS OFF ON
Not used 1 - - NOTE: Measure each voltage on the checking
Auto water
2 A NA terminal of the CPT circuit board.
replenishment
Control strip auto cut 3 NA A
Voltage Tolerance Checked between terminals
Termometer/Hygrometer 4 NA A
+5V +5V±0.2V +5V and GND1
Not used 5 - -
Not used 6 - - Power Supply Circuit Board
Not used 7 - -
Demo mode 8 NA A
A: Applied
NA: Not applied

DIP Switch

F620

· If the +5V voltage is outside the tolerance range,


disconnect the CN11 connector from the CTL32 circuit
board and measure the voltage at the power supply
(pu) circuit board. If the +5V voltage is outside the
CTL32 Circuit Board F486 tolerance range even at the power supply board, turn
the VR51 volume on the power supply circuit board
NOTE: · Leave the DS-2 ON until all condition settings using a screwdriver to adjust it. To increase voltage,
are completed. turn the volume clockwise.
· If the power switch is turned ON with the DS-
2 in the ON position, the E902 error message ! WARNING
will appear only once. Set the breaker to OFF and remove the C11
connector.

E902

4. Open the processing section and loader covers.

5. Set the power switch to STANDBY.

6. Set the main power supply to ON, then set the built-in
circuit breaker to ON, keeping from an electric shock.

7. Set the power switch to ON while pressing the [MODE]


and [SUB] keys on the keyboard.
F621

NOTE: · Refer to “Data resetting”


(see subsection 6.13.1) before performing
this operation.
· All data in the back-up area are rewritten to
the initial settings by this operation
(see subsection 6.13.2).

13-14
Power Supply (PU) Circuit Board 14. Perform each input and output check
(see subsection 6.4.1 to 6.5.1).

! CAUTION
Ensure that all parts are safe before performing the
output check. The motor or solenoid is actually
operated when the output check is done.

15. Set the power switch to STANDBY.

16. Turn the DIP switch (DS-2) to OFF to set the normal
water replenishment condition (see subsection 6.11.8).

Volume (VR51) DIP Switch


F622

9. Set the present time (see subsection 5.2.1).

10. Set the power switch to STANDBY.

11. Set the processing temperature calibration


(see subsection 6.2.1).

NOTE: · Roughly calibrate the temperature at this


step, because it should be re-calibrated
precisely later.
· If the “Temperature abnormal” alarm occurs,
CTL32 Circuit Board F598
clear it by pressing the [YES] key and
continue the calibration. In this case, the
heater power supply has been turned OFF. 17. Set the power switch to ON.
Turn the power switch to STANDBY, then
turn it ON to raise the temperature. 18. Install the electrical equipment cover.

12. Set the following conditions in the order listed. 19. Set the processing temperature calibration again and
recalibrate if necessary (see subsection 6.2.1).
· Processing temperatures (see subsection 5.3.1).
· Replenisher rates
(see subsection 5.4.1). ...................... (NOTE1)
· Replenisher pump output
(see subsection 5.5.1). ...................... (NOTE1)
· Timers (see subsection 5.2.1).
· Error logging
(see subsection 5.7.1). ...................... (NOTE2)
· Processing temperature calibrations
(see subsection 6.2.1). ...................... (NOTE3)

NOTE: 1. The setting data recorded before board


replacement may be set except the data
of processing temperature calibration.
2. The error log has been cleared and only
the errors occurring after replacement
are displayed.
3. Calibrate the temperature precisely after
the actually measured temperature
reaches the setting temperature ± 1˚C.
This can be done after completing all
replacement steps.

13. Check the water replenishment condition settings


(see subsection 6.11.2 to 6.11.7).

13-15
13.3 Electrical Equipment Section

13.3.4 PWA32/PWB32 Circuit Board Replacement

Removal Installation

1. Turn the power switch to STANDBY, and the built-in 1. Install the new PWA32/PWB32 circuit board and
circuit breaker and the main power supply OFF. connect the connectors and wires.

! WARNING 2. Measure the output voltages using a digital voltmeter,


The main power supply MUST be switched OFF. and check the findings against the values in the table
Even if the power switch is at STANDBY, electricity will below.
still be supplied in the power supply area, so that it can
cause electric shocks and short-circuiting.
Voltage Tolerance Checked between terminals
2. Remove the electrical equipment cover +5V +5V±0.2V +5V and GND1 (+5)
(see subsection 13.3.1). +12V +12V±0.6V +12V and GND1 (+12)

3. Discharge capacitors C1 and C2


(see subsection 13.3.2).

4. Disconnect the connectors and wires from the PWA32/


PWB32 circuit board.

5. Remove the PWA32/PWB32 circuit board by unlocking


the eight circuit board posts.

PWA32/PWB32 Circuit Board

Power Supply Circuit Board


F623

3. Install the electrical equipment cover.

F359

13-16
13.3.5 Power Supply (PU) Circuit 13.3.6 Leakage Breaker Test
Board Replacement
1. Remove the electrical equipment cover
Removal (see subsection 13.3.1).

1. Turn the power switch to STANDBY, and the built-in 2. Turn ON the main power supply and built-in circuit
circuit breaker and the main power supply OFF. breaker.

! WARNING 3. Check that the breaker turns OFF when the red button
The main power supply MUST be switched OFF. is pressed. The leakage breaker is faulty if it does not
Even if the power switch is at STANDBY, electricity will turn OFF.
still be supplied in the power supply area, so that it can
cause electric shocks and short-circuiting. Breaker Switch

2. Remove the electric equipment cover


(see subsection 13.3.1).

3. Discharge capacitors C1 and C2


(see subsection 13.3.2).

4. Disconnect the connectors from the power supply


circuit board.

5. Remove the power supply circuit board by removing


the three screws.
Red Button F351
Grounding Wire Screws (3)

Power Supply Circuit Board


F360

Installation

1. Install the new power supply circuit board and connect


the connectors.

2. Check +5V voltage and adjust if necessary


(see step 7 in subsection 13.3.3).

3. Install the electric equipment cover.

13-17
13.3 Electrical Equipment Section

13.3.7 Relay (K21, K22) Replacement 13.3.8 Leakage Breaker Replacement


(CE type only)
Removal
Removal
1. Turn the power switch to STANDBY, and the built-in
1. Turn the power switch to STANDBY, and the built-in circuit breaker and the main power supply OFF.
circuit breaker and the main power supply OFF.
! WARNING
! WARNING The main power supply MUST be switched OFF.
The main power supply MUST be switched OFF. Even if the power switch is at STANDBY, electricity will
Even if the power switch is at STANDBY, electricity will still be supplied in the power supply area, so that it can
still be supplied in the power supply area, so that it can cause electric shocks and short-circuiting.
cause electric shocks and short-circuiting.
2. Remove the electrical equipment cover
2. Remove the electrical equipment cover (see subsection 13.3.1).
(see subsection 13.3.1).
3. Discharge capacitors C1 and C2
3. Discharge capacitors C1 and C2 (see subsection 13.3.2).
(see subsection 13.3.2).
4. Loosen the four screws to disconnect the wires from
4. Disconnect the wires from the relay (K21 or K22). the breaker.

5. Remove the relay by removing the two screws. 5. Remove the leakage breaker by removing the two
screws.
6 4
Leakage Breaker N31 N41

1 Screws (2) Relay 0


F583
N32 Screws (2) N42
F350

Installation
Installation
Install the relay in the reverse order of removal, noting the
following. Install the breaker in the reverse order of removal, noting the
following.
NOTE: Connect the wires to the correct terminals.
NOTE: Connect the wires (N31, N32, N41 and N42) properly
to the terminals on the breaker.

13-18
13.3.9 Circuit Protector (CP1-CP3) 13.3.10 Noise Filter (NF1)
Replacement Replacement
Removal Removal
1. Turn the power switch to STANDBY, and the built-in 1. Turn the power switch to STANDBY, and the built-in
circuit breaker and the main power supply OFF. circuit breaker and the main power supply OFF.

2. Remove the electrical equipment cover 2. Remove the electrical equipment cover
(see subsection 13.3.1). (see subsection 13.3.1).

3. Discharge capacitors C1 and C2 3. Discharge capacitors C1 and C2


(see subsection 13.3.2). (see subsection 13.3.2).

4. Make sure no button of the circuit protectors project. If 4. Disconnect the wires from the noise filter terminals by
the button projects, it must be pressed. removing the five screws.

5. Disconnect the wires from the circuit protector and 5. Remove the noise filter by removing the two screws.
check for continuity between the terminals. If there is
no continuity, the circuit protector is opened and must Wires Nuts (5)
be replaced.

6. Loosen the locks on the circuit protector and remove


the protector.

Noise Filter Grounding Wire


F362

Installation

Install the noise filter in the reverse order of removal.


Circuit Protector F363

Installation

Install the circuit protector in the reverse order of removal.

13-19
13.3 Electrical Equipment Section

13.3.11 Circuit Breaker (NFB) 13.3.12 SSR4 Replacement


Replacement
Removal
Removal
1. Turn the power switch to STANDBY, and the built-in
1. Turn the power switch to STANDBY, and the built-in circuit breaker and the main power supply OFF.
circuit breaker and the main power supply OFF.
2. Remove the electrical equipment cover
! WARNING (see subsection 13.3.1).
The main power supply MUST be switched OFF.
Even if the power switch is at STANDBY, electricity will 3. Discharge capacitors C1 and C2
still be supplied in the power supply area, so that it can (see subsection 13.3.2).
cause electric shocks and short-circuiting.
4. Disconnect the wires from the SSR by removing the
2. Remove the electrical equipment cover four screws.
(see subsection 13.3.1).
5. Remove the SSR by removing the two screws.
3. Discharge capacitors C1 and C2
(see subsection 13.3.2). SSR4 4D1 4D2 Screws (4)

4. Disconnect the wires from the breaker.

N11 N21

4D4 Screws (2) 4D3


F361

Installation
Circuit Breaker N12 N22 F352 Install the SSR in the reverse order of removal.

5. Remove the circuit breaker by removing the four


screws.

Screws (4) F353

Installation
Install the breaker in the reverse order of removal, noting the
following.

NOTE: Connect the wires (N11, N12, N21 and N22) properly
to the terminals on the breaker.

13-20
13.3.13 Counter (CNT) Replacement 13.3.14 Room Temperature/Humidity
(optional) Detector (THT) Replacement
Removal Removal
1. Turn the power switch to STANDBY, and the built-in 1. Turn the power switch to STANDBY, and the built-in
circuit breaker and the main power supply OFF. circuit breaker and the main power supply OFF.

2. Remove the electrical equipment cover 2. Remove the electrical equipment cover
(see subsection 13.3.1). (see subsection 13.3.1).

3. Discharge capacitors C1 and C2 3. Discharge capacitors C1 and C2


(see subsection 13.3.2). (see subsection 13.3.2).

4. Remove the harness duct cover. 4. Remove the detector cover by removing the two
screws.
5. Disconnect the CN32 connector from the PWA32/
PWB32 circuit board. Screws (2)

6. Remove the counter by removing the two screws.

Harness Duct Cover Screws (2)

Detector Cover
F365

5. Remove the detector circuit board from the detector


cover and disconnect the CN54 connector from the
Counter CN32 Connector F364
circuit board.

Installation Detector Circuit Board

Install the counter in the reverse order of removal.

CN54 Connector F366

Installation

Install the detector in the reverse order of removal. After


installation, perform room temperature/humidity calibration
(see subsection 6.11.7).

13-21
13.3 Electrical Equipment Section

13.3.15 Part Selection Depending on


Frequency
Two parts below must be selected depending on the power
line frequency to be used. For more detail procedures of
replacement, see the related pages.

1. Outlet orifice for N1 circulation pumps


(see subsection 9.3.6 for details).

50Hz 60Hz
Orifice Selection 5 mm ID 4.5 mm ID

N1 Orifices

F403

2. Gear head for drive motor (see subsection 12.2.3 for


detail).

50Hz 60Hz
Identification with label of 300K with label of 360K

F344

13-22

You might also like